diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'texmf/doc/latex/revtex')
42 files changed, 8411 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/README b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/README new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ff3578c --- /dev/null +++ b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/README @@ -0,0 +1,190 @@ +%% ****** Start of file README ****** % +%% +%% This file is part of the APS files in the REVTeX 4 distribution. +%% Version 4.2e of REVTeX, October, 2020. +%% +%% Copyright (c) 1999-2020 American Physical Society. +%% + +Last updated 03 October 2020 + +This file describes the contents of this distribution of REVTeX 4.2, +version 4.2d. The definitive source of information about REVTeX 4 +is the APS web page http://journals.aps.org/revtex/. + +User queries should be directed to revtex@aps.org. + +Manifest +-------- +All files in this release are contained within a second zip file within the +main zip file called revtex4-2-tds.zip. This contains all of the REVTeX 4.2 +files in the TeX Directory Structure (TDS) layout used with most current TeX +distributions. Install REVTeX 4.2 by unzipping the files in the appropriate +place (usually the texmf-local directory of your local TeX installation) and +running texhash or the equivalent command to index the files. Please consult your +TeX distribution's guide for installing new packages. + +NOTE: The only files necessary for running REVTeX 4.2 are those under +tex/latex/revtex and bibtex/bst/revtex, but it is a good idea to install +the entire distribution, especially the documentation. + +TeX inputs: tex/latex/revtex/ + ----------------- +revtex4-2.cls - The REVTeX 4.2 class file +aps4-2.rtx - APS-specific customizations for REVTeX 4.2 +aip4-2.rtx - AIP-specific customizations for REVTeX 4.2 +aapm4-2.rtx - AAPM-specific custommizations for REVTeX 4.2 +sor4-2.rtx - SOR-specific customizations for REVTeX 4.2 +apsrmp4-2.rtx - APS-specific customizations for REVTeX 4.2 for Rev. Mod. Phys. +aps10pt4-2.rtx - 10-point size class option file for REVTeX +aps11pt4-2.rtx - 11-point size class option file for REVTeX +aps12pt4-2.rtx - 12-point size class option file for REVTeX +revsymb4-2.sty - A collection of common symbols for use outside of REVTeX +reftest4-2.tex - A helpful diagnostics check for bibliographies when not using BibTeX + +ltxdocext.sty - Part of ltxgrid package used for page layout in REVTeX +ltxfront.sty - Part of ltxgrid package used for page layout in REVTeX +ltxgrid.sty - Part of ltxgrid package used for page layout in REVTeX +ltxutil.sty - Part of ltxgrid package used for page layout in REVTeX + +BibTeX inputs: bibtex/bst/revtex/ + ------------------ +apsrev4-2.bst - BibTeX styles for use for Phys. Rev. journals +apsrmp4-2.bst - BibTeX styles for use for Rev. Mod. Phys. +aipauth4-2.bst - BibTeX styles for AIP journals with author/year style citations +aipnum4-2.bst - BibTeX styles for AIP journals with numerical style citations +aapmrev4-2.bst - BibTeX styles for AAPM journals + + +Documentation: doc/latex/revtex/ + ----------------- +README - How to get started (this file) + +Author guide: doc/latex/revtex/auguide/ + ------ +auguide4-2.tex (pdf) - REVTeX 4.2 Author's Guide +summary4-2.tex (pdf) - REVTeX 4.2 Command and Options Summary +docs.sty - Package used by REVTeX documentation + +APS guide: doc/latex/revtex/aps + ------ +apsguide4-2.tex (pdf) - APS Author Guide for REVTeX 4.2 + +AIP guide: doc/latex/revtex/aip + ------ +aipguide4-2.tex (pdf) - Author's Guide to AIP Substyles for REVTeX 4.2 + +APS Sample document: doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps + ------- +apssamp.tex (pdf) - A sample file showing most common features of an APS + REVTeX 4.2 document +fig_1.eps - sample figure for apssamp.tex +fig_2.eps - sample wide figure for apssamp.tex +vid_1a.eps - sample figure for apssamp.tex +vid_1b.eps - sample figure for apssamp.tex +apssamp.bib - sample BibTeX source file for apssamp.tex +apstemplate.tex - A template for APS authors to follow + +AIP Sample document: doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip + ------- +aipsamp.tex (pdf) - A sample file showing most common features of an AIP + REVTeX 4.2 document +fig_1.eps - sample figure for aipsamp.tex +fig_2.eps - sample wide figure for aipsamp.tex +aipsamp.bib - sample BibTeX source file for aipsamp.tex +aiptemplate.tex - A template for AIP authors to follow + +AAPM Sample document: doc/latex/revtex/sample/aapm + ------- +aapmsamp.tex (pdf) - A sample file showing most common features of an AAPM + REVTeX 4.2 document +fig_1.eps - sample figure for aapmsamp.tex +fig_2.eps - sample wide figure for aapmsamp.tex +aapmsamp.bib - sample BibTeX source file for aapmsamp.tex +aapmtemplate.tex - A template for AAPM authors to follow + + +SOR Sample document: doc/latex/revtex/sample/sor + ------- +sorsamp.tex (pdf) - A sample file showing most common features of an SOR + REVTeX 4.2 document +fig_1.eps - sample figure for sorsamp.tex +fig_2.eps - sample wide figure for sorsamp.tex +sorsamp.bib - sample BibTeX source file for sorsamp.tex +sortemplate.tex - A template for SOR authors to follow + +Programmer's docs: doc/latex/revtex/source/ + ------- +ltxdocext.pdf - Programmer's documentation for the ltxdocext package +ltxfront.pdf - Programmer's documentation for the ltxfront package +ltxgrid.pdf - Programmer's documentation for the ltxgrid package +ltxutil.pdf - Programmer's documentation for the ltxutil package +revtex4-2.pdf - Programmer's documentation for the revtex4.2 document class +aip4-2.pdf - Programmer's documentation for the AIP journal styles + +Source files: source/latex/revtex + ------------------- +ltxdocext.dtx - The source file for the ltxdocext package +ltxfront.dtx - The source file for the ltxfront package +ltxgrid.dtx - The source file for the ltxgrid package +ltxutil.dtx - The source file for the ltxutil package +revtex4-2.dtx - The source file for revtex4.cls and revsymb.sty. +aip4-2.dtx - The source file for AIP journal styles + +Not Included +------------ +The following packages are required by REVTeX but are not +included in this distribution. Please obtain from CTAN +(Comprehensive TeX Archive Network), e.g. <http://www.ctan.org/>. Direct +links to the necessary files can be found at <http://journals.aps.org/revtex/>. + +natbib.dtx - Version 8.31a or later; found in latex/contrib/natbib on CTAN +natbib.ins - LaTeX this to create natbib.sty and natbib + documentation from natbib.dtx +bm.dtx - Bold math style - part of (current!) standard LaTeX2e tools +bm.sty - generated from bm.dtx by running tools.ins +textcase.dtx - Found in latex/contrib/textcase on CTAN +textcase.ins - LaTeX this to generate textcase.sty from textcase.dtx +url.sty - Found in latex/contrib/misc on CTAN + +An up-to-date installation of AMS-LaTeX is also required for certain +documentclass options. Version 2.0 or higher is needed. It is +available from <http://www.ams.org/tex/>. + +Recommended styles and packages +-------------------------- +With REVTeX implemented as a native LaTeX2e document class, users can +take advantage of many of the well-supported LaTeX2e packages available. +Here are some that are particularly useful and recommended. + +longtable.sty for tables running to multiple pages - part of a +standard LaTeX2e distribution. + +hyperref.sty for hyperlinking - should work well with REVTeX 4.2. + +graphics.sty and graphicx.sty for figure inclusion - part of LaTeX2e's +standard distribution. + +Credits +------- +David Carlisle created the first draft of REVTeX 4; Arthur Ogawa has +supported the TeX development versions 4.0 and 4.1. Patrick Daly was so kind +as to incorporate needed changes into natbib and custom-bib. All worked under +commission from the APS, with the support of AIP, and was coordinated by Mark +Doyle, APS. Version 4.2 was initially developed by Aptara Corporation under +the guidance of Mark Doyle, APS, and Brian Goss, AIP. Development of the final +version of 4.2 was done by Mark Doyle. The APS is the maintainer of REVTeX, +and all bugs are our responsibility. Please e-mail feedback to revtex@aps.org. + +Backwards compatibility +----------------------- +The REVTeX 4.2 class file has been named revtex4-2.cls to distinguish it +from its predecessors. Files prepared under REVTeX 4.0 or 4.1 may need minor +changes to process under 4.2 and the output may be formatted differently. + +LaTeX2e requirements +-------------------- +REVTeX 4 requires: +LaTeX2e [1996/06/01], +natbib [2009/11/07] +textcase diff --git a/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/aip/aipguide4-2.pdf b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/aip/aipguide4-2.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..6c2d319 --- /dev/null +++ b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/aip/aipguide4-2.pdf diff --git a/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/aip/aipguide4-2.tex b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/aip/aipguide4-2.tex new file mode 100644 index 0000000..039bfe0 --- /dev/null +++ b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/aip/aipguide4-2.tex @@ -0,0 +1,430 @@ +%% ****** Start of file auguide.tex ****** % +%% +%% This file is part of the AIPP distribution of substyles for REVTeX 4.2 +%% For version 4.2a of REVTeX, December 2014 +%% +%% Copyright (c) 2014 American Institute of Physics Publishing +%% +\listfiles +\documentclass[% + reprint,% +%secnumarabic,% + amssymb, amsmath,% + aip,cha,% +%groupedaddress,% +%frontmatterverbose, +]{revtex4-2} + +\usepackage{docs}% +\usepackage{bm}% +\usepackage[colorlinks=true,linkcolor=blue]{hyperref}% +%\nofiles +\expandafter\ifx\csname package@font\endcsname\relax\else + \expandafter\expandafter + \expandafter\usepackage + \expandafter\expandafter + \expandafter{\csname package@font\endcsname}% +\fi +\hyphenation{title} + +\begin{document} + +\title{Author's Guide to AIP Substyles for \revtex~4.2}% + +\author{AIP Journal Program}% +\email{tex@aip.org} +\affiliation{American Institute of Physics Publishing Suite 300, 1305 Walk Whitman Road\\Melville, New York 11747-4300, USA}% + +\date{November 2014}% +\revised{December 2014}% + +\maketitle + +\tableofcontents + +\section{Introduction} + +This is the author's guide to the AIP substyles for \revtex~4.2, +providing a useful formatting tool +for \LaTeX\ users submitting papers to journals +published by the American Institute of Physics. +This guide is intended as an adjunct to the documentation for \revtex\ itself +(published by the American Physical Society), +so information contained therein is not repeated here, +except as it bears on the specific features of the AIP substyles. + + +\subsection{Prerequisite Documentation} + +The following documentation should be considered your first source of information +on how to prepare your document for use with this format; +they are to be found within the APS \revtex~4.2 distribution. +Updated versions of these are maintained at +the \revtex~4.2 homepage located at \url{http://journals.aps.org/revtex/}, +are also available at the Comprehensive \TeX\ Archive Network (CTAN, see \url{http://www.ctan.org/}), +and form part of the \TeX Live distribution of \TeX. +\begin{itemize} +\item \textit{Author's Guide to \revtex~4.2} +\item \textit{\revtex~4.2 Command and Options Summary} +\end{itemize} +The present guide builds upon these documents, with which you should already be familiar. + +The AIP substyles distribution for \revtex~4.2 includes +a sample document (\file{aipsamp.tex}), +a good starting point for +the manuscript you are preparing for submission to an AIP journal. + +By using \revtex's \textit{Author's Guide to \revtex~4.2}, you can develop your +document until it contains all of the content you desire. +This guide informs you on document class options, commands, and +markup guidelines specific to AIP journals. + +\subsection{Software Requirements} + +This guide assumes a working \revtex~4.2 installation including the AIP substyles. +Please see the installation guide included with the distribution.\cite{Note1} + +Please note that the AIP substyles work {\it only} with \revtex~4.2: +the original \revtex~4.0 release does {\it not} make the AIP substyle available, nor is it compatible with them. + +For your computer to run \revtex~4.2 with the AIP substyles, the following are required: +\begin{itemize} +\item +a working installation of \LaTeX\, +\item +\revtex~4.2 and all packages it requires, +\item +the AIP substyles for \revtex~4.2, and +\item +any further \LaTeX\ packages used in your document. +\end{itemize} + +The easiest way to obtain all of the needed software is to install an up-to-date distribution of \TeX, +like \TeX Live, available on CTAN. + +To obtain the most up-to-date version of this software, please see \url{http://publishing.aip.org/authors/preparing-your-manuscript}. + + +\subsection{Submitting to AIP Journals} + +Authors preparing a manuscript for submission to +AIP journals should consult the Information for Contributors for the applicable journal, +available through links at \url{http://scitation.aip.org/authors}. +These requirements are not covered systematically in this author's guide; +you are responsible for understanding the requirements of the particular journal to which +you will submit your article. + +For further information about journal requirements, contact the Editorial +Office of the appropriate journal. (Follow links at \url{http://scitation.aip.org/authors}.) + +\subsection{Contact Information}\label{sec:resources}% +Any bugs, problems, or inconsistencies concerning the AIP journal substyles +should be reported to AIP support at \href{mailto:tex@aip.org}{tex@aip.org}. +Reports should include information on the error and a +\textit{small} sample document that manifests the problem, if possible. +(Please don't send large files!) + +Feedback concerning \revtex~4.2 itself should be sent, as usual, +to the American Physical Society at\\ \href{mailto:revtex@aps.org}{revtex@aps.org}. + +To determine if the problem you are experiencing belongs to \revtex\ or is specific to the +AIP substyles, simply remove \texttt{aip} from your document class options and rerun +your document. If the problem goes away, you may assume that it is due to the AIP substyles; +if not, it belongs to \revtex. + +\section{Sample \LaTeXe\ Document} +As the \revtex\ documentation makes clear, your document employs a \LaTeXe\ document class +(specifically \texttt{revtex4-2.cls}), so you should use +the \LaTeXe\ commands and environments familiar to you with, say, the +standard article class \texttt{revtex4-2.cls}, and you will be able to +employ many of the packages you are used to using with \LaTeXe. + +Using \texttt{aipsamp.tex} as an example, +your document will start with the usual \revtex\ \cmd\documentclass\ statement, but with +a particular document class option \texttt{aip} that specifies the AIP substyle: +\begin{verbatim} +\documentclass[aip]{revtex4-2} +\end{verbatim} +You will then invoke the \LaTeXe\-compatible packages your document requires, say: +\begin{verbatim} +\usepackage{graphicx}% +\usepackage{dcolumn}% +\usepackage{bm}% +\end{verbatim} +follow up with your document content: +\begin{verbatim} +\begin{document} +... +\end{verbatim} +and finish with a statement specifying your Bib\TeX\ database: +\begin{verbatim} +\bibliography{aipsamp} +\end{document} +\end{verbatim} + +The books +in the bibliography of this guide provide extensive coverage of all topics +pertaining to preparing documents under \LaTeXe\; they are highly recommended. + +\section{\revtex\ Class Options Specific to AIP} + +\subsection{Journal Substyle} +To access particular features of the AIP substyle, you will specify an additional document class option: the journal substyle, e.g., +\begin{verbatim} +\documentclass[aip,jcp]{revtex4-2} +\end{verbatim} +in this case, \textit{J. Chem. Phys.}, the default. +A complete list of AIP journals with the corresponding journal substyle appears in Table~\ref{tab:journals}. +\begin{table} +\caption{\label{tab:journals}AIP journal substyles} +\begin{ruledtabular} +\begin{tabular}{ll} +\textbf{Journal} & \textbf{class option} \\ +\itshape AIP Advances &\texttt{adv}\\ +\itshape Appl. Phys. Lett. &\texttt{apl}\\ +\itshape Appl. Phys. Lett. Mater.&\texttt{apm}\\ +\itshape Biomicrofluidics &\texttt{bmf}\\ +\itshape Chaos &\texttt{cha}\\ +\itshape J. Appl. Phys. &\texttt{jap}\\ +\itshape J. Chem. Phys. &\texttt{jcp}\footnotemark[1]\\ +\itshape J. Math. Phys. &\texttt{jmp}\\ +\itshape J. Renewable Sustainable Energy&\texttt{rse}\\ +\itshape Phys. Fluids &\texttt{pof}\\ +\itshape Phys. Plasmas &\texttt{pop}\\ +\itshape Rev. Sci. Instrum.&\texttt{rsi}\\ +\itshape Structural Dynamics &\texttt{sd}\\ +\end{tabular} +\end{ruledtabular} +\footnotetext[1]{Default journal substyle.} +\end{table} + +\subsection{Options for Citations and Bibliography} +The citation style for AIP journals is: +\begin{itemize} +\item +numerical (default style), +\item +author-year, and +\item +numerical author-year, +\end{itemize} +the latter two styles being only allowed for \textit{Chaos} or \textit{J. Math. Phys.} + +The familiar numerical citations and numbered bibliography are the default for most journals: +citations are superscript numbers, and the (numbered) bibliographic entries appear in the order cited. + +Author-year citations are only allowed for +\textit{Chaos} or \textit{J. Math. Phys.}, with citations given in author-and-year format. +Bibliographic entries are sorted by alphabetical order of first author's surname, then by year. + +Numerical author-year citations +(only allowed for \textit{Chaos} or \textit{J. Math. Phys.}) +are superscript numbers, just like numerical citations, +but the bibliographic entries are sorted like the author-year entries and are numbered. +This means that the first citation will not necessarily be~1. + +To obtain the numerical style, simply accept the default, or supply a class option of \texttt{numerical}: +\begin{verbatim} +\documentclass[aip,numerical]{revtex4-2} +\end{verbatim} +For author-year citations for \textit{Chaos} or \textit{J. Math. Phys.}, +you may specify the \texttt{author-year} option: +\begin{verbatim} +\documentclass[aip,author-year]{revtex4-2} +\end{verbatim} +Each of the above two options are part of standard \revtex. + +To obtain numerical author-year citations +for \textit{Chaos} or \textit{J. Math. Phys.}, +give the author-numerical option: +\begin{verbatim} +\documentclass[aip,author-numerical]{revtex4-2} +\end{verbatim} +Note that the \texttt{author-numerical} option is not part of standard \revtex\, so use of it +outside of the AIP substyles may not have any effect. + +\subsection{Formatting Options} +There are two commonly used formats for an article you may write. +One will comply with the manuscript submission formatting requirements of the editorial office of the journal you are submitting to. +The other will emulate the format of your article in the published journal itself. + +For journal submission, accept the default, or you may specify the \texttt{preprint} option: +\begin{verbatim} +\documentclass[aip,preprint]{revtex4-2} +\end{verbatim} +To emulate the formatting of the journal, specify the \texttt{reprint} option: +\begin{verbatim} +\documentclass[aip,reprint]{revtex4-2} +\end{verbatim} +Note that emulation is not by any means complete: the fonts used will differ, and therefore +the length of the article will not represent an accurate estimate. +Other details may also differ. + +A summary of class options of interest to AIP authors appears in Table~\ref{tab:options}. +\begin{table} +\caption{\label{tab:options}Other class options} +\begin{ruledtabular} +\begin{tabular}{ll} +\textbf{Function} & \textbf{class option} \\ +\multicolumn{2}{l}{\textit{Citation and References}}\\ +superscript numbered&\texttt{numerical}\footnotemark[1]\textsuperscript{,}\footnotemark[2]\\ +author-year&\texttt{author-year}\footnotemark[3]\\ +numbered author-year&\texttt{author-numerical}\footnotemark[3]\\ +% +\multicolumn{2}{l}{\textit{Format}}\\ +journal submission&\texttt{preprint}\footnotemark[1]\\ +journal emulation&\texttt{reprint}\\ +\end{tabular} +\end{ruledtabular} +\footnotetext[1]{Default option.}% +\footnotetext[2]{Standard}% +\footnotetext[3]{Only allowed for \textit{Chaos} or \textit{J. Math. Phys.}}% +\end{table} + +\section{Useful \LaTeXe\ Markup} +\LaTeXe\ markup is the preferred way to structure your file. +In general, the use of low-level commands like \TeX\ primitives or Plain \TeX\ macros +is less preferable. +Please see the \revtex\ User's Guide,\cite{Note2} +the \LaTeX\ manual,\cite{LaTeXman} +and the \LaTeXe\ book\cite{Compan} +for further details. + +\subsection{Title and Front Matter}\label{sec:front} + +The \revtex\ User's Guide has complete information on using \revtex's special markup for your +article's title, author list, abstract, and other front matter elements. +Note that class option \texttt{superscriptaddress} is the default for the AIP substyles, +as required by all AIP journals. + +\subsection{Lead Paragraph} +One AIP journal, \textit{Chaos}, requires a paragraph of text to precede the first +\cmd\section\ of the article; +this is known as a lead paragraph and is formatted boldface. +To give your article a lead paragraph, +include a quotation environment ahead of the first \cmd\section\ command: +\begin{verbatim} +\documentclass[aip]{revtex4-2} +\begin{document} + \begin{quotation} + Here is my lead paragraph! + \end{quotation} + \section{Introduction} +... +\end{verbatim} + +The \texttt{quotation} environment functions normally after the first \cmd\section\ command in the document. + +\section{Body} + +For general information on commands used in the body of the document, see the \revtex\ User's Guide. +Herein are some features specific to the AIP author. + +\subsection{Footnotes} + +If you are using numbered citations (numerical or numbered author-year), +footnotes are by default incorporated into the reference section +along with your bibliographic entries. +This automated feature is only effective if you use Bib\TeX\ to prepare your +bibliography. + +Author-year style bibliography does not lend itself to such a treatment, +so by default footnotes appear in text as is usual. +However, be advised that, if your article is accepted for publication, +footnotes may be incorporated into text during the production process. + +\section{Citations and References}\label{sec:endnotes} + +The preparation of your bibliography ``by hand'' is possible; +however, if you do so, +you will be entirely responsible +for compliance with submission requirements for your bibliographic entries, +for incorporating any text footnotes into the references, +and for checking bibliographic entries. +(In this connection, you may find useful the file \texttt{reftest.tex}, distributed with \revtex.) + +There are numerous reasons to use Bib\TeX, not least because it automates the first and second of the above checks. + +\subsection{\label{sec:use-bib}Using Bib\protect\TeX} + +Refer to the \revtex\ User's Guide, the \LaTeX\ manual, and the Bib\TeX\ manual +for full information about using Bib\TeX. + +When using Bib\TeX\, keep in mind that changing your bibliography style or citation style +(via the document class options described above) will require you to rerun Bib\TeX. +The standard litany (using \texttt{aipsamp.tex} as an example) for this is: +\begin{verbatim} +> latex aipsamp +> bibtex aipsamp +> latex aipsamp +> latex aipsamp +\end{verbatim} +Here, the first invocation of \texttt{latex} has the effect of rewriting the +\texttt{aipsamp.aux} file, +and the invocation of \texttt{bibtex} creates a new \texttt{aipsamp.bbl} file. +The next two runs of \texttt{latex} are then required: +the first to update the \texttt{aipsamp.aux} file reflecting the new values of your citations +and the second to employ those citations correctly. +Be sure to check the end of the \texttt{aipsamp.log} file for any message advising you to +rerun \texttt{latex}. + +\subsection{Multiple References per Citation} +In an article using numerical citations, +it is not uncommon to encounter the need for a citation +that refers to more than one article or other reference. +To accommodate such a case, \revtex~4.2 implements markup similar to that of the +\texttt{mcite} package for \LaTeXe. + +Let's say that two citation keys \texttt{able} and \texttt{baker} +need to be combined into a single reference. +The syntax for the \cmd\cite\ command is: +\begin{verbatim} +word\cite{able,*baker} further text +\end{verbatim} +When you run Bib\TeX\, the resulting bibliography will contain the two entries, but run together +as a single numbered reference. +In the \cmd\cite\ command argument, any cite key that starts with the * character +signifies that its bibliographic entry is to be joined together with the one preceding it; +the \texttt{*} may join together any number of entries into a single reference. + +\begin{thebibliography}{9}\label{sec:TeXbooks}% +\bibitem{Note1} +For help regarding the installation of this software and its use, please send email to \href{mailto:tex@aip.org}{tex@aip.org}. +% +\bibitem{Note2} +Available with the \revtex\ distribution, see \url{http://journals.aps.org/revtex/}. +% +\bibitem[Lamport(1996)]{LaTeXman} +L. Lamport, +\emph{\LaTeX\, a Document Preparation System} +(Addison-Wesley, Reading, MA, 1996). +% +\bibitem[Goossens(1994)]{Compan} +M. Goosens, F. Mittelbach, and A. Samarin, +\emph{The \LaTeX\ Companion} +(Addison-Wesley, Reading, MA, 1994). +% +\bibitem[Knuth(1986)]{TeXbook} +D. E. Knuth, +\emph{The \TeX book} +(Addison-Wesley, Reading, MA, 1986). +% +\bibitem[Kopka(1995)]{Guide} +H. Kopka and P. Daly, +\emph{A Guide to \LaTeXe} +(Addison-Wesley, Reading, MA, 1995). +% +\bibitem[Goossens(1997)]{CompanG} +M. Goossens, S. Rahtz, and F. Mittelbach, +\emph{The \LaTeX\ Graphics Companion} +(Addison-Wesley, Reading, MA, 1997). +% +\bibitem[Rahtz(1999)]{CompanW} +S. Rahtz, M. Goossens \emph{et al.}, +\emph{The \LaTeX\ Web Companion} +(Addison-Wesley, Reading, MA, 1999). +% +\end{thebibliography} + +\end{document} + diff --git a/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/aip4-2.pdf b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/aip4-2.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..5048a39 --- /dev/null +++ b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/aip4-2.pdf diff --git a/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/aps/apsguide4-2.pdf b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/aps/apsguide4-2.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..02819f0 --- /dev/null +++ b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/aps/apsguide4-2.pdf diff --git a/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/aps/apsguide4-2.tex b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/aps/apsguide4-2.tex new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f50d9a8 --- /dev/null +++ b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/aps/apsguide4-2.tex @@ -0,0 +1,425 @@ +%% ****** Start of file apsguide4-2.tex ****** % +%% +%% This file is part of the APS files in the REVTeX 4.2 distribution. +%% Version 4.2b of REVTeX, December 2018. +%% +%% Copyright (c) 2019 The American Physical Society. +%% +%% See the REVTeX 4.2 README file for restrictions and more information. +%% +\documentclass[twocolumn,secnumarabic,amssymb, nobibnotes, aps, prd]{revtex4-2} +%\usepackage{acrofont}%NOTE: Comment out this line for the release version! +\newcommand{\revtex}{REV\TeX\ } +\newcommand{\classoption}[1]{\texttt{#1}} +\newcommand{\macro}[1]{\texttt{\textbackslash#1}} +\newcommand{\m}[1]{\macro{#1}} +\newcommand{\env}[1]{\texttt{#1}} +\setlength{\textheight}{9.5in} + +\begin{document} + +\title{APS Author Guide for \revtex~4.2}% + +\author{American Physical Society}% +\email[REVTeX Support: ]{revtex@aps.org} +\affiliation{1 Research Road, Ridge, NY 11961} +\date{December 2018}% +\maketitle +\tableofcontents + +\section{Introduction} +Articles published in American Physical Society journals are converted to +an XML file during final journal production. Other formats such +as PDF are derived directly from the XML, which constitutes the version of record. +Even before journal production, the APS editorial process can make use +of the information in a properly prepared manuscript. Information such +as title, authors, affiliations, etc., can be automatically +extracted and used to populate our manuscript database. References can +also be culled, cross-checked for accuracy, and used to create a +linked version for referees and editors. Moreover, time can be saved +as referrals can be made electronically rather than by conventional +mail. Thus, a well-prepared electronic manuscript can enhance the +entire peer review process from author to reader while making the +whole process less expensive. To this end, authors should follow the +guidelines in this document when preparing their submissions to \textit{Physical Review Letters}, + \textit{Reviews of Modern Physics}, \textit{Physical Review A-E, Physical Review X, Physical Review Applied. Physical Review Fluids, Physical Review Materials, Physical Review Accelerators and Beams,} and \textit{Physical Review Physics Education Research}. + +Updated versions of this document will be made available at \url{https://journals.aps.org/revtex/}. For more complete +descriptions of how to use the \revtex\ 4.2 macros, please see the +\textit{\revtex~4.2 Author's Guide} included with the \revtex~4.2 +distribution. Questions about \revtex\ 4.2 and using it to submit to APS journals may be +emailed to \texttt{revtex@aps.org}. + +\section{Formatting} +\subsection{Preprint, reprint, and twocolumn options} +\revtex~4.2 offers a \classoption{reprint} class option to typeset a manuscript +in a format that is a close approximation to the actual journal's appearance. It should +be emphasized that this is only an \textit{approximation}; a manuscript may be substantially different +in length or appearance after it goes through our production process. This is mostly due to the choice +of fonts and the scaling of figures. + +\revtex\ 4.2 is designed to +make it straightforward to switch between two-column and single-column +formatting just by changing the class option. Authors may submit with +either the \classoption{reprint} or the \classoption{twocolumn} class options. +The \classoption{preprint} primarily does three things: It increases +the font size to 12pt, increases the line spacing, and changes the +formatting to single column. + +\subsection{Paper size} +Manuscripts should be submitted to APS formatted for letter size +paper. Papers are sent electronically to referees who may +want to print them out. Letter size formatting ensures that this will +be trouble free for all referees. + +\section{Marking up front matter} +Perhaps the most important macros are those +pertaining to the markup of the front matter (title, authors, +affiliations, abstract, etc.). Note that proper +use of the \revtex\ 4.2 macros means that explicit centering environments +in the front matter are not needed and should not be used. + +\subsection{Title} +The title of the manuscript should be specified using the \m{title} macro. A +double backslash {\textbackslash\textbackslash} may be used to force a line break in a long +title. + +\subsection{Authors, affiliations, and collaborations} +\label{sec:authors} +\revtex\ 4.2 makes it straightforward to input author names and link them up properly with affiliations. Authors should let \revtex\ 4.2 do the work of grouping authors and affiliations and, if using the superscript style, numbering affiliations. Please follow these guidelines: +\begin{itemize} +\item Use a single \m{author} macro for each author's name. \revtex\ 4.2 automatically puts in all commas and the word `and.' +\item Use the \m{surname} macro to explicitly indicate if an author's family name consists of more than one name or if the family name is not the author's last name. +\item The \m{email} macro may be used to specify an author's e-mail +address. The \m{thanks} macro must not be used for this. Only the +e-mail address itself may appear in the macro's required argument. +\item The \m{homepage} macro may be used to specify a URL associated +with an author. The \m{thanks} macro must not be used for this. Only the +URL may appear in the macro's required argument. +\item The \m{altaffiliation} macro may be used to specify an alternate +affiliation or temporary address for an author. The \m{thanks} macro +must not be used for this. Only the affiliation +may appear in the macro's required argument. +\item The \m{thanks} macro may be used only if one of the more +specific macros list above does not apply. +\item Use a single \m{affiliation} for each affiliation. +\item Superscripts linking authors to affiliations must be +accomplished using the \classoption{superscriptaddress} class option +rather than putting in explicit superscripts by hand. +\item A collaboration may be specified by using the \m{collaboration} +macro. The \m{author} macro must not be used for collaborations. +\end{itemize} +\subsection{Abstract} +The abstract must be specified using the \env{abstract} +environment. Note that in \revtex\ 4.2, the abstract must come before +the \m{maketitle} command. \revtex\ 4.2 now allows the the use of the \env{description} +environment within the abstract to provide \textit{structured abstracts}. For instance, \textit{Physical Review C} would like authors to provide abstracts with sections summarizing the paper's \textbf{Background}, \textbf{Purpose}, \textbf{Method}, \textbf{Results}, and \textbf{Conclusions}. This can be accomplished in the following manner: +\begin{verbatim} +\begin{abstract} +\begin{description} +\item[Background] This part would describe the +context needed to understand what the paper +is about. +\item[Purpose] This part would state the purpose +of the present paper. +\item[Method] This part describe the methods +used in the paper. +\item[Results] This part would summarize the +results. +\item[Conclusions] This part would state the +conclusions of the paper. +\end{description} +\end{abstract} +\end{verbatim} + +\section{References and footnotes} +Authors are strongly encouraged +to use Bib\TeX\ when preparing their bibliographies. If Bib\TeX\ is used, current production processes +require that the \texttt{.bbl} file be included directly into the +manuscript's main \texttt{.tex} file. \revtex\ 4.2 comes with two Bib\TeX\ style files for formatting +references, one for the \textit{Physical Review} journals and one +for \textit{Review of Modern Physics}. In 4.2, the Bib\TeX\ styles have been modified to display journal article titles in the bibliography. + +The following apply whether +Bib\TeX\ is used or not. +\begin{itemize} +\item Authors should use the \m{cite} and \m{bibitem} commands to create +bibliographies and to refer to items in the bibliography. ``By hand" +numbering of references should be avoided. +\item \revtex~4.2 provides new syntax for combining multiple citations into a single entry in the bibliography and for putting extra text before and after a reference. Please refer to \textit{\revtex~4.2 Author's Guide} included with the \revtex~4.2 distribution for full details. +\item Footnotes must be specified using the \m{footnote} +macro. \revtex\ 4.2 will place the footnotes in +the bibliography for the \textit{Physical Review} +journals. Please note that even if you don't use Bib\TeX, you may have to run Bib\TeX\ to get the footnotes to appear. Footnotes giving additional information about authors (such +as e-mail addresses) must not be specified using the \m{footnote} +macro (see Section~\ref{sec:authors}). +\item Avoid custom footnotes using \m{footnotemark} and \m{footnotetext} [except in the context of tables (see +Section~\ref{sec:tablenotes})]. +\item References should be formatted and specified according to the +\textit{Physical Review Style Guide}. Note that using Bib\TeX\ automatically ensures this. +\item URLs should be specified using the \m{url} macro. Bib\TeX\ will automatically take +care of this if the \texttt{url} field is used. +\item E-print identifiers should be included using the \m{eprint} macro. Bib\TeX\ will automatically take care of this if the \texttt{eprint} field is used. +\end{itemize} + +Please see the \revtex~4.2 Author's Guide for new features in \revtex~4.2's APS Bib\TeX\ styles, including support for citing data sets, journals that use DOIs in place of page numbers, and journals that use year and issue instead of volume to uniquely identify articles. + +\section{Body of the paper} +\subsection{Sectioning and cross-referencing} +For sectioning a manuscript, the basic rule is to use the appropriate +sectioning commands (\m{section}, \m{subsection}, \m{subsubsection}, +\textit{etc.}). Cross-referencing a section must be done by using the +proper \m{label} and \m{ref} commands. Cross-referencing by hand is +not allowed. \m{part}, \m{chapter}, and \m{subparagraph} should not be +used. + +\subsection{Appendices} +Appendices should be specified using the \m{appendix} command which +specifies that all following sections create with the \m{section} +commands are appendices. If there is only one appendix, then the +\m{appendix*} command should be used instead. + +\subsection{Acknowledgments} +Any acknowledgments should be included by using the +\env{acknowledgments} environment. Note that in \revtex~4.2, this is +an environment and not a command. + +\subsection{Counters} +No counters may be created and the standard ones may not be +altered. If an exceptional label is needed for an equation, the \m{tag} +command (requires the \classoption{amsmath} class option) should be used. Please +note that the use of the \m{tag} command may conflict with the use of the \classoption{hyperref} package +due an incompatibility between \classoption{amsmath} and \classoption{hyperref}. + +\subsection{Fonts} +It is preferable to avoid the older \TeX\ and \LaTeX\ 2.09 macros for +controlling fonts such as \m{rm}, \m{it}, \textit{etc.} Rather, it is +better to use the macros introduced in \LaTeXe. If the older font +commands are used (they really should be avoided!), be sure to use +curly braces to properly limit the extent of the font +change. \verb+{\bf ...}+ is the correct method. +Commands for controlling text and math font changes are summarized in +Table~\ref{tab:fonts}. + +\begin{table} +\caption{\label{tab:fonts}\LaTeXe\ and AMS-\LaTeX\ font summary.} +\begin{ruledtabular} +\begin{tabular}{lp{2in}} +\m{textit} & Italics. Replaces \m{it}\\ +\m{textbf} & Bold face. Replaces \m{bf}\\ +\m{textrm} & Roman. Replaces \m{rm}\\ +\m{textsl} & Slanted. Replaces \m{sl}\\ +\m{textsc} & Small caps. Replaces \m{sc}\\ +\m{textsf} & Sans serif. Replaces \m{sf}\\ +\m{texttt} & Typewriter. Replaces \m{tt}\\ +\m{textmd} & Medium series\\ +\m{textnormal} & Normal\\ +\m{textup} & Upright\\ +\m{mathbf} & Bold face\\ +\m{mathcal} & Replaces \m{cal}\\ +\m{mathit} & Italics\\ +\m{mathnormal} & Replaces \m{mit}\\ +\m{mathsf} & Sans serif\\ +\m{mathtt} & Typewriter\\ +\m{mathfrak} & Fraktur: Requires \classoption{amsfonts} or \classoption{amssymb} class option\\ +\m{mathbb} & Bold blackboard: Requires \classoption{amsfonts} or \classoption{amssymb} class option\\ +\m{bm} & Bold Greek and other math symbols: Requires +\verb+\usepackage{bm}+ and may require the \classoption{amsfonts} class +option +\end{tabular} +\end{ruledtabular} +\end{table} + +Bold Greek letters and other bold math symbols should be accomplished +with the use of \texttt{bm.sty} which is distributed as a required +tool with the latest versions of \LaTeXe\ and should be loaded via +\verb+\usepackage{bm}+. This package introduces the \m{bm} +macro. Some bold characters may require using the +\classoption{amsfonts} class option. + +New fonts may not be declared with \m{newfont}. Font attribute +commands for selecting a font family, shape, and series are all +disallowed; the standard \LaTeXe\ font selection macros list above +should be used instead. + +Finally, the \m{symbol} macro is also not allowed. + +\subsection{Environments} +\subsubsection{Lists} +The standard list environments \texttt{itemize}, \texttt{enumerate}, +and \texttt{description} are allowed. The \m{item} macro with or without +the optional argument is also allowed. Customization of the list environments +(with macros such as \m{labelstyle}, \m{labelitemi}, \m{labelenumi}, +\m{itemsep}, etc.) is allowed but may be ignored in production. +Generalized lists (\m{begin\{list\}}) and trivial lists +(\m{begin\{trivlist\}}) are not allowed. + +\subsubsection{Other Environments} +Creating generalized new environments with \m{newenvironment} is not +allowed. Creating a new theorem environment with \m{newtheorem} is +allowed though. + +The tabbing environment and the macros \m{=}, \m{$>$}, \m{`}, and +\m{'} are allowed but may be ignored in production. Conversion +programs used in production should recognize the escapes \m{a=}, +\m{a'}, and \m{a`} for using the corresponding accents within a +tabbing environment though. + +The \env{verbatim} environment is allowed. + +\subsection{Boxes} +Most boxes and macros to manipulate them are not allowed. These +include \m{raisebox}, \m{parbox}, \m{minipage}, \m{rulebox}, +\m{framebox}, \m{mbox}, \m{fbox}, \m{savebox}, \m{newsavebox}, +\m{sbox}, \m{usebox}, and the environment \m{begin\{lrbox\}}. Rules +produced with \m{rule} are not allowed. + +\subsubsection{Margin Notes} +Margin notes created with \m{marginpar} are not allowed, as are the +associated style parameters \m{marginparwidth}, \m{marginparsep}, and +\m{marginparpush}. + + +\section{Math Markup} +In general, all math markup and the standard math environments from +\LaTeXe\ are allowed. These include \m{begin\{math\}}, +\m{begin\{displaymath\}}, \m{begin\{equation\}}, +\m{begin\{eqnarray\}}, and \m{begin\{eqnarray*\}}. The shortcuts \$, +\$\$, \m{[}, and \m{]} are allowed. In addition, authors may use +almost all of the additional markup introduced by AMS-\LaTeX\ by using +the \classoption{amsmath} class option. The explicit exceptions are +\m{genfrac}, \m{boxed}, and \m{smash}. The markup contained in +\texttt{amsextra} and \texttt{amsthm} may not be used +though. Commutative diagrams created with the \texttt{amscd} package +are acceptable. + +\section{Figures} +\subsection{Figure inclusions} +Figures should be included into a \revtex~4.2 manuscript by using the +standard \LaTeXe\ macros. \LaTeXe\ includes +several powerful packages for including the files in various +formats. The two main packages are \texttt{graphics} and +\texttt{graphicx}. Both offer a macro called +\m{includegraphics}; +they mainly differ in how arguments for +controlling figure placement (\textit{e.g.}, scaling and rotation) +are passed to the \m{includegraphics}. + +The \env{figure} environment should be used to add a caption to the +figure and to allow \LaTeX\ to number and place the figures where they +fit best. If a figure needs to be referred to in the text, +rather than manually numbering the figures a \m{label} should be added +to the figure environment (best practice is to put the label within +the argument of the \m{caption} command) and the \m{ref} macro should be used to +reference this label. Figures that span the page should use the +\m{figure*} environment. The \env{picture} environment must not be +used directly (one can include an Encapsulated PostScript figure that +was produced using the \env{picture} environment of course). + +\subsection{\label{sec:figplace}Figure placement} +Figures should be placed as close as possible to the point where they are first +referenced. There is no need to place all figures +separately at the end of the manuscript and it is preferred that +authors leave the figures in their natural locations. Authors may +also find useful the \revtex~4.2 \classoption{floatfix} class option +which adds emergency float placement processing to avoid ``stuck'' +floats which would otherwise be deferred to the end of the job (and +can lead to the fatal \texttt{``Too many unprocessed floats''} +message). + + +\section{Tables} +\label{sec:tables} +The standard \LaTeXe\ table formatting environments are supported as is +the use of the \texttt{longtable} package. Tables may be reformatted +during production to meet APS style guidelines. +Here are some helpful hints for trying to get tables formatted correctly: +\begin{itemize} +\item Use the \texttt{longtable} package to get tables to break +across pages. +\item The macro \m{squeezetable} will reduce the font size of the +table. This macro must occur within a group outside the table +environment. The proper markup is: +\begin{verbatim} +\begingroup +\squeezetable +\begin{table} +... +\end{table} +\endgroup +\end{verbatim} +\item Try using the float placement option \texttt{H} which will +enable \LaTeX\ to break a float across pages. Long tables are more +attractively set with \env{longtable} however. +\begin{verbatim} +\begin{table}[H] +\begin{ruledtabular} +\begin{tabular} +... +\end{tabular} +\end{ruledtabular} +\end{table} +\end{verbatim} +\end{itemize} + +\subsection{Doubled rules and table formatting} +\revtex\ 4.2 provides the \env{ruledtabular} environment which +automatically puts the scotch rules (double lines) around tables and +formats all enclosed \env{tabular} environments to the full width of +the tables and improves inter-column spacing. This environment should +be used whenever possible. + +\subsection{Wide tables} +When typesetting using \classoption{twocolumn}, tables can either span +a single column or both columns. Using the '\verb+*+'-ed version of +the \env{table} or \env{longtable} environments produces wide tables +that span the columns. + +Tables that are very wide and that may be better typeset in a +landscape orientation (rotated 90 degrees) should be enclosed in a +\env{turnpage} environment. This will place the rotated table on its own +page. Note that some dvi previewers may not be able to show the table +properly, but \texttt{dvips} and \texttt{pdflatex} work correctly. + +\subsection{Table placement} +Tables should be placed as close as possible to the point where they +are first referenced. There is no need to place all tables separately +at the end of the manuscript and this is not desirable for APS +purposes. The class option \classoption{floatfix} may be helpful for +table placement as well as figure placement (see Section~\ref{sec:figplace}). + +\subsection{Aligning columns on a decimal point} +The standard \LaTeXe\ macro package \classoption{dcolumn} should be +used to accomplish this. + +\subsection{Tablenotes} +\label{sec:tablenotes} +Footnotes in tables (tablenotes) should use the \m{footnote} +macro. However, if more than one reference to the same footnote is +needed, authors may use \m{footnotetext} and \m{footnotemark}. This +will produce notes (labeled by lower-case roman letters) inserted +below the table rather than in the reference section or at the bottom +of the page. + + +\section{Author-defined macros} +Authors may define convenience macros to save keystrokes. This means +that the macros may not invoke \TeX\ macros such as \m{if} or other +context dependent commands. Also, \LaTeXe\ provides three macros for +declaring new commands: \m{providecommand}, \m{newcommand}, and +\m{renewcommand} (as well as their `\verb+*+'-ed versions). These +should be used. Authors may not use \TeX\relax's low-level commands +\m{def}, \m{edef}, and \m{gdef}. + +\section{Summary} +To ensure the best use of \TeX\ manuscripts, authors need to follow +the guidelines specified here. Use of low-level formatting commands to +finely control horizontal and vertical spacing may be ignored during +production, or even worse, make it impossible to convert the +manuscript to XML. Authors should keep +things as simple as possible and correctly use the proper \revtex~4.2 +or \LaTeXe\ macros. Any questions about usage may be directed to +\texttt{revtex@aps.org}. + +\end{document} + diff --git a/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/auguide4-2.pdf b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/auguide4-2.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..aae56da --- /dev/null +++ b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/auguide4-2.pdf diff --git a/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/auguide4-2.tex b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/auguide4-2.tex new file mode 100644 index 0000000..deeaf3a --- /dev/null +++ b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/auguide4-2.tex @@ -0,0 +1,1799 @@ +%% ****** Start of file authguide.tex ****** % +%% +%% This file is part of the APS files in the REVTeX 4 distribution. +%% Version 4.2b of REVTeX, January 2019 +%% +%% Copyright (c) 2019 The American Physical Society. +%% +%% See the REVTeX 4.2 README file for restrictions and more information. +%% +\listfiles +\documentclass[% +,aps% + ,twocolumn% + ,secnumarabic% +,amssymb, amsmath,nobibnotes, aps, prl, floatfix]{revtex4-2} +\usepackage{docs}% +\usepackage{bm}% +\usepackage[colorlinks=true,linkcolor=blue]{hyperref}% +%\nofiles +\expandafter\ifx\csname package@font\endcsname\relax\else + \expandafter\expandafter + \expandafter\usepackage + \expandafter\expandafter + \expandafter{\csname package@font\endcsname}% +\fi + +\begin{document} + +\title{\revtex~4.2 Author's Guide}% +\author{American Physical Society}% +\email{revtex@aps.org} +\affiliation{1 Research Road, Ridge, NY 11961} +\date{December 2018}% +\maketitle +\tableofcontents +\clearpage +\section{Introduction} + +This is the author's guide to \revtex~4.2, the preferred submission +format for all APS and AIP journals. This guide is intended to be a concise +introduction to \revtex~4.2. The documentation has been separated out +into smaller units to make it easier to locate essential +information. + +The following documentation is also part of the \revtex~4.2 +distribution. Updated versions of these will be maintained at +the \revtex~4.2 homepage located at \url{http://journals.aps.org/revtex/}. +\begin{itemize} +\item \textit{APS Author Guide for \revtex~4.2} +\item \textit{Author's Guide to AIP Substyles for \revtex~4.2} +\item \textit{\revtex~4.2 Command and Options Summary} +\end{itemize} +This guide assumes a working \revtex~4.2 +installation. Please see the installation instructions included with the +distribution. +\subsection{Changes in \revtex~4.2} +The \revtex\ system for \LaTeX\ began its development in 1986 and has gone through three major revisions since then. \revtex~4 was released in August, 2001. Since that time, many user requests for new features were received. These requests were taken care of in the \revtex~4.1, which was released in August, 2010. \revtex~4.2 is the current release. + +\revtex~4.2 incorporates the following changes: + +\begin{itemize} +\item \textbf{Added support for additional APS journals, \textit{Physical Review X}, \textit{Physical Review Accelerators and Beams}, \textit{Physical Review Applied}, \textit{Physical Review Fluids}, \textit{Physical Review Materials}, and \textit{Physical Review Physics Education Research}.} There are new options \texttt{prx}, \texttt{prab}, \texttt{prapplied}, \texttt{prfluids}, and \texttt{prmaterials}, and \texttt{prper}. + +\item \textbf{Added a unified \texttt{physrev} option for \textit{Physical Review} journal style (the \textit{Phys. Rev.} journals have no or few variations).} + +\item \textbf{The \texttt{prb} option now conforms with \textit{Physical Review B}'s updated style that uses the same non-superscripted citations as other APS journals}. + +\item \textbf{Added support for additional AIP journals, \textit{AIP Advances}, \textit{Applied Physics Letters Materials}, and \textit{Structural Dynamics} as well as \textit{AIP Conference Proceedings}. There are new options \texttt{adv}, \texttt{apm}, \texttt{sd}, and \texttt{cp}.} + +\item \textbf{Added support for the Society of Rheology (\texttt{sor}) and its journal, \textit{Journal of Rheology} (\texttt{jor}).} + +\item \textbf{The \texttt{reprint} style for AIP's journal JMP was changed to one-column formatting.} + +\item \textbf{For all APS journal options, complete article titles are now displayed in bibliography entries citing journal articles when using Bib\TeX\ by default.} + +\item \textbf{In the \textit{Phys. Rev.} Bib\TeX\ style file, article titles in the bibliography are set in roman font}. + +\item \textbf{The behavior of the \texttt{noeprints} option has been improved}. + +\item \textbf{Support has been added for citing data sets in the Bib\TeX\ styles}. + +\item \textbf{Support for citing journals that use a DOI instead of pages or article identifiers has been improved (for APS \textit{Phys. Rev.} Bib\TeX\ style)}. + +\item \textbf{The indentation of tables of contents have been improved}. + +\item \textbf{The \texttt{onecolumn} option no longer defaults to creating a separate title page}. + +\item \textbf{The \texttt{showpacs} option is completely ignored now}. + +\item \textbf{A bug when using \texttt{booktabs.sty} has been fixed}. + +\item \textbf{The formatting of references for some commonly cited journals has been improved in the \textit{Phys. Rev.} Bib\TeX\ style}. + +\item \textbf{URLs generated for DOIs now use \texttt{https://doi.org/} as the base in the Bib\TeX\ styles.} + +\item \textbf{URLs generated for arXiv.org e-print identifiers now use \texttt{https://arXiv.org/abs/} as the base in the Bib\TeX\ styles.} + +\end{itemize} + +\subsection{\revtex~4 Backwards Compatibility} +Documents prepared under \revtex~4 and \revtex~4.1 should process correctly under \revtex~4.2. However, the formatting of the pages and, if using Bib\TeX, the references may change. Under 4.2, articles typeset with the \texttt{prb} option will be typeset \texttt{cite} commands differently and adjacent punctuation may need to be moved accordingly. Default behaviors some other options may also have changed as described above. + + + +\subsection{Submitting to APS Journals} + +Authors using \revtex~4.2 to prepare a manuscript for submission to +\textit{Physical Review Letters}, \textit{Physical Review}, \textit{Reviews of Modern Physics}, +or other APS journals must also read the companion document \textit{APS Author Guide for \revtex~4.2} +distributed with \revtex\ and follow the guidelines detailed there. + +The \revtex~4.2 distribution includes both a template +(\file{apstemplate.tex}) and a sample document (\file{apssamp.tex}). +The template is a good starting point for a manuscript. In the +following sections are instructions that should be sufficient for +creating a paper using \revtex~4.2. + +Further information about submissions to the American +Physical Society may be found at \url{http://journals.aps.org/revtex/}. + +\subsection{Submitting to AIP Journals} + +\revtex~4.2 includes support for the journals of the American Institute of Physics. +The style files and authoring guides for these journals are distributed as part +\revtex~4.2 distribution. The distribution includes both a template +(\file{aiptemplate.tex}) and a sample document (\file{aipsamp.tex}). +The template is a good starting point for a manuscript. In the +following sections are instructions that should be sufficient for +creating a paper using \revtex~4.2. + + + +More information may be found at +\url{http://publishing.aip.org/authors/preparing-your-manuscript}. Please consult the \textit{Author's Guide to AIP Substyles for \revtex~4.2} for more information about submissions to AIP journals, AIP styles files, and other AIP-specific information. + +\subsection{Contact Information}\label{sec:aipresources}% +Any bugs, problems, or inconsistencies with \revtex\ or the APS journal style files should be reported to +\revtex\ support at \verb+revtex@aps.org+. Reports should include information on the error and a \textit{small} +sample document that manifests the problem if possible (please don't send large files!). Issues related to the AIP journal styles should be sent directly to \verb+tex@aip.org+. + +\section{Some \LaTeXe\ Basics} +\revtex~4.2 must sometimes patch the underlying +\LaTeX\ kernel. This means that \revtex~4.2 requires a fairly recent version of +\LaTeXe. Versions prior to 2005/12/01 may not work +correctly. \revtex~4.2 will be maintained to be compatible with future +versions of \LaTeXe. + +\subsection{Useful \LaTeXe\ Markup} +\LaTeXe\ markup is the preferred way to accomplish many basic tasks. + +\subsubsection{Fonts} + +Because \revtex~4.2 is based upon \LaTeXe, it inherits all of the +macros used for controlling fonts. Of particular importance are the +\LaTeXe\ macros \cmd{\textit}, \cmd{\textbf}, \cmd{\texttt} for changing to +an italic, bold, or typewriter font respectively. One should always +use these macros rather than the lower-level \TeX\ macros \cmd{\it}, +\cmd{\bf}, and \cmd{\tt}. The \LaTeXe\ macros offer +improvements such as better italic correction and scaling in super- +and subscripts for example. Table~\ref{tab:fonts} +summarizes the font selection commands in \LaTeXe. + +\begin{table} +\caption{\label{tab:fonts}\LaTeXe\ font commands} +\begin{ruledtabular} +\begin{tabular}{ll} +\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textbf{Text Fonts}}\\ +\textbf{Font command} & \textbf{Explanation} \\ +\cmd\textit\marg{text} & Italics\\ +\cmd\textbf\marg{text} & Boldface\\ +\cmd\texttt\marg{text} & Typewriter\\ +\cmd\textrm\marg{text} & Roman\\ +\cmd\textsl\marg{text} & Slanted\\ +\cmd\textsf\marg{text} & Sans Serif\\ +\cmd\textsc\marg{text} & Small Caps\\ +\cmd\textmd\marg{text} & Medium Series\\ +\cmd\textnormal\marg{text} & Normal Series\\ +\cmd\textup\marg{text} & Upright Series\\ + &\\ +\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textbf{Math Fonts}}\\ +\cmd\mathit\marg{text} & Math Italics\\ +\cmd\mathbf\marg{text} & Math Boldface\\ +\cmd\mathtt\marg{text} & Math Typewriter\\ +\cmd\mathsf\marg{text} & Math Sans Serif\\ +\cmd\mathcal\marg{text} & Calligraphic\\ +\cmd\mathnormal\marg{text} & Math Normal\\ +\cmd\bm\marg{text}& Bold math for Greek letters\\ + & and other symbols\\ +\cmd\mathfrak\marg{text}\footnotemark[1] & Fraktur\\ +\cmd\mathbb\marg{text}\footnotemark[1] & Blackboard Bold\\ +\end{tabular} +\end{ruledtabular} +\footnotetext[1]{Requires \classname{amsfonts} or \classname{amssymb} class option} +\end{table} + +\subsubsection{User-defined macros} +\LaTeXe\ provides several macros that enable users to easily create new +macros for use in their manuscripts: +\begin{itemize} +\footnotesize +\item \cmd\newcommand\marg{\\command}\oarg{narg}\oarg{opt}\marg{def} +\item \cmd\newcommand\verb+*+\marg{\\command}\oarg{narg}\oarg{opt}\marg{def} +\item \cmd\renewcommand\marg{\\command}\oarg{narg}\oarg{opt}\marg{def} +\item \cmd\renewcommand\verb+*+\marg{\\command}\oarg{narg}\oarg{opt}\marg{def} +\item \cmd\providecommand\marg{\\command}\oarg{narg}\oarg{opt}\marg{def} +\item \cmd\providecommand\verb+*+\marg{\\command}\oarg{narg}\oarg{opt}\marg{def} +\end{itemize} +Here \meta{\\command} is the name of the macro being defined, +\meta{narg} is the number of arguments the macro takes, +\meta{opt} are optional default values for the arguments, and +\meta{def} is the actually macro definiton. \cmd\newcommand\ creates a +new macro, \cmd\renewcommand\ redefines a previously defined macro, +and \cmd\providecommand\ will define a macro only if it hasn't +been defined previously. The *-ed versions are an optimization that +indicates that the macro arguments will always be ``short'' arguments. This is +almost always the case, so the *-ed versions should be used whenever +possible. + +The use of these macros is preferred over using plain \TeX's low-level +macros such as +\cmd\def{},\cmd\edef{}, and \cmd\gdef{}. APS authors must follow the +\textit{APS Author Guide for \revtex~4.2} when defining macros. + +\subsubsection{Symbols} + +\LaTeXe\ has added some convenient commands for some special symbols +and effects. These are summarized in Table~\ref{tab:special}. See +\cite{Guide} for details. + +\begin{table} +\caption{\label{tab:special}\LaTeXe\ commands for special symbols and effects} +\begin{ruledtabular} +\begin{tabular}{lc} +Command & Symbol/Effect\\ +\cmd\textemdash & \textemdash\\ +\cmd\textendash & \textendash\\ +\cmd\textexclamdown & \textexclamdown\\ +\cmd\textquestiondown & \textquestiondown\\ +\cmd\textquotedblleft & \textquotedblleft\\ +\cmd\textquotedblright & \textquotedblright\\ +\cmd\textquoteleft & \textquoteleft\\ +\cmd\textquoteright & \textquoteright\\ +\cmd\textbullet & \textbullet\\ +\cmd\textperiodcentered & \textperiodcentered\\ +\cmd\textvisiblespace & \textvisiblespace\\ +\cmd\textcompworkmark & Break a ligature\\ +\cmd\textcircled\marg{char} & Circle a character\\ +\end{tabular} +\end{ruledtabular} +\end{table} + +\LaTeXe\ provides additional symbols in a +separate package called \classname{latexsym}. To use these symbols, include +the package using: +\begin{verbatim} +\usepackage{latexsym} +\end{verbatim} + +\subsection{Using \LaTeXe\ packages with \revtex}\label{sec:usepackage}% + +Many \LaTeXe\ packages are available, for instance, on CTAN at +\url{http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/} +and at +\url{http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/}. Full \TeX\ distributions +such as \TeX\ +Live \url{http://www.tug.org/texlive/} provide an excellent and complete installation of \TeX\ that is +easy to maintain. Some of these packages +are automatically loaded by \revtex~4.2 when certain class options are +invoked and are, thus, ``required.'' They will either be distributed +with \revtex\ or are already included with a standard \LaTeXe\ +distribution. + +Required packages are automatically loaded by \revtex\ on an as-needed +basis. Other packages should be loaded using the +\cmd\usepackage\ command. To load the +\classname{hyperref} package, the document preamble might look like: +\begin{verbatim} +\documentclass{revtex4-2} +\usepackage{hyperref} +\end{verbatim} + +Some common (and very useful) \LaTeXe\ packages are \textit{a priori} +important enough that \revtex~4.2 has been designed to be specifically +compatible with them. +A bug stemming from the use of one of these packages in +conjunction with any of the APS journals may be reported by contacting +\revtex\ support. +\begin{description} +\item[\textbf{AMS packages}] \revtex~4.2 is compatible with and depends + upon the AMS packages +\classname{amsfonts}, +\classname{amssymb}, and +\classname{amsmath}. In fact, \revtex~4.2 requires use of these packages +to accomplish some common tasks. See Section~\ref{sec:math} for more. +\revtex~4.2 requires version 2.0 or higher of the AMS-\LaTeX\ package. + +\item[\textbf{array and dcolumn}] +The \classname{array} and \classname{dcolumn} packages are part of +\LaTeX's required suite of packages. \classname{dcolumn} is required +to align table columns on decimal points (and it in turn depends upon +the \classname{array} package). + +\item[\textbf{longtable}] +\file{longtable.sty} may be used for large tables that will span more than one +page. \revtex~4.2 dynamically applies patches to longtable.sty so that +it will work in two-column mode. + +\item[\textbf{hyperref}] \file{hyperref.sty} is a package that is +used for putting hypertext links into \LaTeXe\ documents. +\revtex~4.2 has hooks to allow e-mail addresses and URL's to become +hyperlinks if \classname{hyperref} is loaded. + +\item[\textbf{booktabs}] \revtex~4.2 improves compatibility with \classname{booktabs.sty}. + +\end{description} + +Other packages will conflict with \revtex~4.2 and should be +avoided. Usually such a conflict arises because the package adds +enhancements that \revtex~4.2 already includes. Here are some common +packages that clash with \revtex~4.2: +\begin{description} +\item[\textbf{multicol}] \file{multicol.sty} is a package by Frank Mittelbach +that adds support for multiple columns. In fact, early versions of +\revtex~4.2 used \file{multicol.sty} for precisely this. \revtex\ +incorporates its own support for multiple-column typesetting. + +\item[\textbf{cite}] Donald Arseneau's \file{cite.sty} is often used to provide +support for sorting a \cmd\cite\ command's arguments into numerical +order and to collapse consecutive runs of reference numbers. \revtex~4.2 +has this functionality built-in already via the \classname{natbib} package. + +\item[\textbf{mcite}] \revtex~4.2 already contains a lot of this +functionality through its updated syntax for the \cmd\cite\ command and +the latest \classname{natbib} package. + +\item[\textbf{endfloat}] The same functionality can be accomplished +using the \classoption{endfloats} class option. + +\item[\textbf{float}] \texttt{float.sty} provides a mechanism for creating new float classes with just a few commands. \revtex~4.2 has limited compatible with float.sty. If attempting to use this package, be sure to put any \cmd\newfloat\ commands after the \verb+\begin{document}+ line. + +\end{description} + +\section{The Document Preamble} + +The preamble of a \LaTeX\ document is the set of commands that precede +the \envb{document} line. It contains a +\cmd\documentclass\ line to load the \revtex~4.2 class (\textit{i.e.}, +all of the \revtex~4.2 macro definitions), \cmd\usepackage\ macros to +load other macro packages, and other macro definitions. + +\subsection{The \emph{documentclass} line} +The basic formatting of the manuscript is controlled by setting +\emph{class options} using +\cmd\documentclass\oarg{options}\aarg{\classname{revtex4-2}}. +The optional arguments that appear in the square brackets control the layout of the +document. At this point, one only needs to choose: +\begin{itemize} +\item Either the \classoption{aps} (default) or \classoption{aip} society option +\item One of the chosen society's journal styles such as \classoption{prl} or \classoption{apl} +\item A layout option such as \classoption{preprint} (single-column formatting), \classoption{reprint} (an approximation +to the selected journal's actual layout which may be one- or two-column depending on the journal), or \classoption{twocolumn} +\end{itemize} +Usually, one would want to use \classoption{preprint} for draft papers. Paper size options are also +available as well. In particular, \classoption{a4paper} is available +as well as the rest of the standard \LaTeX\ paper sizes. A +full list of class options is given in the \textit{\revtex~4.2 Command +and Options Summary}. + +\subsection{Loading other packages} +Other packages may be loaded into a \revtex~4.2 document by using the +standard \LaTeXe\ \cmd\usepackage\ command. For instance, to load +the \classoption{graphics} package, one would use +\verb+\usepackage{graphics}+. + +\section{The Front Matter}\label{sec:front} + +After choosing the basic look and feel of the document by selecting +the appropriate class options and loading in whatever other macros are +needed, one is ready to move on to creating a new manuscript. After +the preamble, be sure to put in a \envb{document} line (and put +in an \enve{document} as well). This section describes the macros +\revtex~4.2 provides for formatting the front matter of the +article. The behavior and usage of these macros can be quite +different from those provided in the \LaTeXe\ \classname{article} class. +\subsection{Setting the title} + +The title of the manuscript is simply specified by using the +\cmd\title\aarg{title} macro. A \verb+\\+ may be used to put a line +break in a long title. + +\subsection{Specifying a date}% + +The \cmd\date\marg{date} command outputs the date on the +manuscript. Using \cmd\today\ will cause \LaTeX{} to insert the +current date whenever the file is run: +\begin{verbatim} +\date{\today} +\end{verbatim} + +\subsection{Specifying authors and affiliations} + +The \revtex~4.2 macros for specifying authors and their affiliations are designed + to save labor for authors and during production. Authors and affiliations are +arranged into groupings called, appropriately enough, \emph{author +groups}. Each author group is a set of authors who share the same set +of affiliations. Author names are specified with the \cmd\author\ +macro while affiliations (or addresses) are specified with the +\cmd\affiliation\ macro. Author groups are specified by sequences of +\cmd\author\ macros followed by \cmd\affiliation\ macros. An +\cmd\affiliation\ macro applies to all previously specified +\cmd\author\ macros which don't already have an affiliation supplied. + +For example, if Bugs Bunny and Roger Rabbit are both at Looney Tune +Studios, while Mickey Mouse is at Disney World, the markup would be: +\begin{verbatim} +\author{Bugs Bunny} +\author{Roger Rabbit} +\affiliation{Looney Tune Studios} +\author{Mickey Mouse} +\affiliation{Disney World} +\end{verbatim} +The default is to display this as +\begin{center} +Bugs Bunny and Roger Rabbit\\ +\emph{Looney Tune Studios}\\ +Mickey Mouse\\ +\emph{Disney World}\\ +\end{center} +This layout style for displaying authors and their affiliations is +chosen by selecting the class option +\classoption{groupedaddress}. Journal styles usually default this option, + so it need not be specified explicitly. The other major way of displaying this +information is to use superscripts on the authors and +affiliations. This can be accomplished by selecting the class option +\classoption{superscriptaddress}. To achieve the display +\begin{center} +Bugs Bunny,$^{1}$ Roger Rabbit,$^{1,2}$ and Mickey Mouse$^{2}$\\ +\emph{$^{1}$Looney Tune Studios}\\ +\emph{$^{2}$Disney World}\\ +\end{center} +one would use the markup +\begin{verbatim} +\author{Bugs Bunny} +\affiliation{Looney Tune Studios} +\author{Roger Rabbit} +\affiliation{Looney Tune Studios} +\affiliation{Disney World} +\author{Mickey Mouse} +\affiliation{Disney World} +\end{verbatim} + +Note that \revtex~4.2 takes care of any commas and \emph{and}'s that join +the author names together and font selection, as well as any +superscript numbering. Only the author names and affiliations should +be given within their respective macros. See below for further information +regarding the proper way to add footnotes to author names and affiliations. + +There is a third class option, \classoption{unsortedaddress}, for +controlling author/affiliation display. The default +\classoption{groupedaddress} will actually sort authors into the +approriate author groups if one chooses to specify an affiliation for +each author. The markup: +\begin{verbatim} +\author{Bugs Bunny} +\affiliation{Looney Tune Studios} +\author{Mickey Mouse} +\affiliation{Disney World} +\author{Roger Rabbit} +\affiliation{Looney Tune Studios} +\end{verbatim} +will result in the same display as for the first case given +above even though Roger Rabbit is specified after Mickey Mouse. To +avoid Roger Rabbit being moved into the same author group as Bugs +Bunny, use the +\classoption{unsortedaddress} option instead. In general, it is safest +to list authors in the order they should appear and specify +affiliations for multiple authors rather than one at a time. This will +afford the most independence for choosing the display option. Finally, +it should be mentioned that the affiliations for the +\classoption{superscriptaddress} are presented and numbered +in the order that they are encountered. These means that the order +will usually follow the order of the authors. An alternative ordering +can be forced by including a list of \cmd\affiliation\ commands before +the first \cmd{\author} in the desired order. Then use the exact same +text for each affilation when specifying them for each author. + +If an author doesn't have an affiliation, the \cmd\noaffiliation\ +macro may be used in the place of an \cmd\affiliation\ macro. + + +\subsubsection{Collaborations} + +A collaboration name can be specified with the \cmd\collaboration\ +command. This is very similar to the \cmd\author\ command. In \revtex~4.2, it can +be used with both the \classoption{superscriptaddress} and \classoption{groupedaddress} class options. The +\cmd\collaboration\ command should appear at the end of the list of +authors. The collaboration name will be appear centered in parentheses +between the list of authors and the list of +affiliations. Because collaborations +don't normally have affiliations, one needs to follow the +\cmd\collaboration\ with \cmd\noaffiliation. + +\subsubsection{Footnotes for authors, collaborations, affiliations or title}\label{sec:footau} + +Often one wants to specify additional information associated with an +author, collaboration, or affiliation such as an e-mail address, an +alternate affiliation, or some other ancillary information. +\revtex~4.2 introduces several new macros just for this purpose. They +are: +\begin{itemize} +\item\cmd\email\oarg{optional text}\aarg{e-mail address} +\item\cmd\homepage\oarg{optional text}\aarg{URL} +\item\cmd\altaffiliation\oarg{optional text}\aarg{affiliation} +\item\cmd\thanks\aarg{miscellaneous text} +\end{itemize} +In the first three, the \emph{optional text} will be prepended before the +actual information specified in the required argument. In the APS journal style files, \cmd\email\ and \cmd\homepage\ no longer have a default value. However, in the AIP styles, each have a default text for their optional arguments +(`Electronic address:' and `URL:' respectively). The \cmd\thanks\ +macro should only be used if one of the other three do not apply. Any +author name can have multiple occurences of these four macros. Note +that unlike the +\cmd\affiliation\ macro, these macros only apply to the \cmd\author\ +that directly precedes it. Any \cmd\affiliation\ \emph{must} follow +the other author-specific macros. A typical usage might be as follows: +\begin{verbatim} +\author{Bugs Bunny} +\email[E-mail me at: ]{bugs@looney.com} +\homepage[Visit: ]{http://looney.com/} +\altaffiliation[Permanent address: ] + {Warner Brothers} +\affiliation{Looney Tunes} +\end{verbatim} +This would result in the footnote ``E-mail me at: \texttt{bugs@looney.com}, +Visit: \texttt{http://looney.com/}, Permanent address: Warner +Brothers'' being attached to Bugs Bunny. Note that: +\begin{itemize} +\item Only an e-mail address, URL, or affiliation should go in the +required argument in the curly braces. +\item The font is automatically taken care of. +\item An explicit space is needed at the end of the optional text if one is +desired in the output. +\item Use the optional arguments to provide customized +text only if there is a good reason to. +\end{itemize} + +The \cmd\collaboration\ , \cmd\affiliation\ , or even \cmd\title\ can +also have footnotes attached via these commands. If any ancillary data +(\cmd\thanks, \cmd\email, \cmd\homepage, or +\cmd\altaffiliation) are given in the wrong context (e.g., before any +\cmd\title, \cmd\author, \cmd\collaboration, or \cmd\affiliation\ +command has been given), then a warning is given in the \TeX\ log, and +the command is ignored. + +Duplicate sets of ancillary data are merged, giving rise to a single +shared footnote. However, this only applies if the ancillary data are +identical: even the order of the commands specifying the data must be +identical. Thus, for example, two authors can share a single footnote +indicating a group e-mail address. + +Duplicate \cmd\affiliation\ commands may be given in the course of the +front matter, without the danger of producing extraneous affiliations +on the title page. However, ancillary data should be specified for +only the first instance of any particular institution's +\cmd\affiliation\ command; a later instance with different ancillary +data will result in a warning in the \TeX\ log. + +It is preferable to arrange authors into +sets. Within each set all the authors share the same group of +affiliations. For each author, give the \cmd\author\ (and appropriate +ancillary data), then follow this author group with the needed group +of \cmd\affiliation\ commands. + +If affiliations have been listed before the first +\cmd\author\ macro to ensure a particular ordering, be sure +that any later \cmd\affiliation\ command for the given institution is +an exact copy of the first, and also ensure that no ancillary data is +given in these later instances. + + +Each journal class option has a default behavior for the placement of these +ancillary information footnotes. For instance, the \classoption{prb} option puts all +such footnotes at the start of the bibliography while the \classoption{prl} +journal styles displays them on the first page. One can override a +journal style's default behavior by specifying explicitly the class +option +\classoption{bibnotes} (puts the footnotes at the start of the +bibliography) or \classoption{nobibnotes} (puts them on the first page). +Please consult the documentation for the various journal style files for further information. + +\subsubsection{Specifying first names and surnames} + +Many authors have names in which either the surname appears first +or in which the surname is made up of more than one name. To ensure +that such names are accurately captured for indexing and other +purposes, the \cmd\surname\ macro should be used to indicate which portion +of a name is the surname. Similarly, there is a \cmd\firstname\ macro +as well, although usage of \cmd\surname\ should be sufficient. If an +author's surname is a single name and written last, it is not +necessary to use these macros. These macros do nothing but indicate +how a name should be indexed. Here are some examples: +\begin{verbatim} +\author{Andrew \surname{Lloyd Weber}} +\author{\surname{Mao} Tse-Tung} +\end{verbatim} + +\subsection{The abstract} +An abstract for a paper is specified by using the \env{abstract} +environment: +\begin{verbatim} +\begin{abstract} +Text of abstract +\end{abstract} +\end{verbatim} +Note that in \revtex~4.2 the abstract must be specified before the +\cmd\maketitle\ command and there is no need to embed it in an explicit +minipage environment. + +\subsubsection{Structured abstracts} +A new feature in \revtex~4.2 is support for \textit{structured abstracts}. A ``structured" abstract is an abstract divided into labeled sections. For instance, \textit{Physical Review C} would like authors to provide abstracts with sections summarizing the paper's \textbf{Background}, \textbf{Purpose}, \textbf{Method}, \textbf{Results}, and \textbf{Conclusions}. This can be accomplished by using the \texttt{description} environment within the \texttt{abstract} environment. For example: +\begin{verbatim} +\begin{abstract} +\begin{description} +\item[Background] This part would describe the +context needed to understand what the paper +is about. +\item[Purpose] This part would state the purpose +of the present paper. +\item[Method] This part describe the methods +used in the paper. +\item[Results] This part would summarize the +results. +\item[Conclusions] This part would state the +conclusions of the paper. +\end{description} +\end{abstract} +\end{verbatim} + +\subsection{PACS codes} +PACS codes are obsolete. The \classoption{showpacs} option does nothing, but is present so that older documents may still be processed under \revtex~4.2. + +\subsection{Keywords} +A \cmd\keywords\ macro may also be used to indicate keywords for the +article. +\begin{verbatim} +\keywords{nuclear form; yrast level} +\end{verbatim} +This will be displayed below the abstract and PACS (if supplied). Like +PACS codes, the actual display of the the keywords is controlled by +two classoptions: \classoption{showkeys} and +\classoption{noshowkeys}. An explicit \classoption{showkeys} must be +included in the \cmd\documentclass\ line to display the keywords. + +\subsection{Institutional report numbers} +Institutional report numbers can be specified using the \cmd\preprint\ +macro. If the \classoption{preprintnumbers} class option is specified, these will be displayed in the upper right corner of the first page. Multiple \cmd\preprint\ macros maybe supplied (space is +limited though, so only three or less may actually fit). Please note that the \classoption{preprint} class option does not automatically invoke \classoption{preprintnumbers}. + +\subsection{maketitle} +After specifying the title, authors, affiliations, abstract, PACS +codes, and report numbers, the final step for formatting the front +matter of the manuscript is to execute the \cmd\maketitle\ macro by +simply including it: +\begin{verbatim} +\maketitle +\end{verbatim} +The \cmd\maketitle\ macro must follow all of the macros listed +above. The macro will format the front matter in accordance with the various +class options that were specified in the +\cmd\documentclass\ line (either implicitly through defaults or +explicitly). + +\section{The body of the paper} + +For typesetting the body of a paper, \revtex~4.2 relies heavily on +standard \LaTeXe\ and other packages (particulary those that are part +of AMS-\LaTeX). Users unfamiliar with these packages should read the +following sections carefully. + +\subsection{Section headings} + +Section headings are input as in \LaTeX. +The output is similar, with a few extra features. + +Four levels of headings are available in \revtex{}: +\begin{quote} +\cmd\section\marg{title text}\\ +\cmd\subsection\marg{title text}\\ +\cmd\subsubsection\marg{title text}\\ +\cmd\paragraph\marg{title text} +\end{quote} + +Use the starred form of the command to suppress the automatic numbering; e.g., +\begin{verbatim} +\section*{Introduction} +\end{verbatim} + +To label a section heading for cross referencing, best practice is to +place the \cmd\label\marg{key} within the argument specifying the heading: +\begin{verbatim} +\section{\label{sec:intro}Introduction} +\end{verbatim} + +In some journal substyles, such as those of the APS, +all text in the \cmd\section\ command is automatically set uppercase. +If a lowercase letter is needed, use \cmd\lowercase\aarg{x}. +For example, to use ``He'' for helium in a \cmd\section\marg{title text} command, type +\verb+H+\cmd\lowercase\aarg{e} in \marg{title text}. + +Use \cmd\protect\verb+\\+ to force a line break in a section heading. +(Fragile commands must be protected in section headings, captions, and +footnotes and \verb+\\+ is a fragile command.) + +\subsection{Paragraphs and General Text} + +Paragraphs always end with a blank input line. Because \TeX\ +automatically calculates linebreaks and word hyphenation in a +paragraph, it is not necessary to force linebreaks or hyphenation. Of +course, compound words should still be explicitly hyphenated, e.g., +``author-prepared copy.'' + +Use directional quotes for quotation marks around quoted text +(\texttt{``xxx''}), not straight double quotes (\texttt{"xxx"}). +For opening quotes, use one or two backquotes; for closing quotes, +use one or two forward quotes (apostrophes). + +\subsection{One-column vs. two-column layouts}\label{sec:widetext} + +One of the hallmarks of \textit{Physical Review} and many of the AIP journals is their two-column +formatting. \revtex~4.2 provides the \classoption{reprint} class option that provides for each +journal class option a close approximation to the journal's actual production formatting. Note that +the \classoption{reprint} option will give either one or two-column formatting as appropriate for the particular journal. +For most APS and AIP journals, the \classoption{reprint} option will take care of formatting the front matter +(including the abstract) as a single column and will typeset the body in two columns. \revtex~4.2 has its own +built-in two-column formatting macros to provide well-balanced columns as well as reasonable control over the placement of floats in either +one- or two-column modes. When drafting papers, it is common to use a one-column format. This is best achieved by using the +\classoption{preprint} class option. Authors may override a particular journal's formatting by using the lower level options \classoption{onecolumn} and \classoption{twocolumn}, but best practice is to stick with the \classoption{preprint} and \classoption{reprint} options. + +Please note that the \classoption{reprint} class option is only an \textit{approximation} of a journal's final layout. Because of font differences, figure rescaling, and other factors, authors should not expect the \classoption{reprint} option to give fully accurate estimates of an article's ultimate length after being typeset for the journal. + +Occasionally it is necessary to change the formatting from two-column to +one-column to better accommodate very long equations that are more +easily read when typeset to the full width of the page. This is +accomplished using the \env{widetext} environment: +\begin{verbatim} +\begin{widetext} +long equation goes here +\end{widetext} +\end{verbatim} +In two-column mode, this will temporarily return to one-column mode, +balancing the text before the environment into two short columns, and +returning to two-column mode after the environment has +finished. \revtex~4.2 will also add horizontal rules to guide the +reader's eye through what may otherwise be a confusing break in the +flow of text. The +\env{widetext} environment has no effect on the output under the +\classoption{preprint} class option because this already uses +one-column formatting. + +Use of the \env{widetext} environment should be restricted to the bare +minimum of text that needs to be typeset this way. However, short pieces +of paragraph text and/or math between nearly contiguous wide equations +should be incorporated into the surrounding wide sections. + +Low-level control over the column grid can be accomplished with the +\cmd\onecolumngrid\ and \cmd\twocolumngrid\ commands. Using these, one +can avoid the horizontal rules added by \env{widetext}. These commands +should only be used if absolutely necessary. Wide figures and tables +should be accommodated using the proper \verb+*+ environments. + +\subsection{Cross-referencing}\label{sec:xrefs} + +\revtex{} inherits the \LaTeXe\ features for labeling and cross-referencing +section headings, equations, tables, and figures. This section +contains a simplified explanation of these cross-referencing features. +The proper usage in the context of section headings, equations, +tables, and figures is discussed in the appropriate sections. + +Cross-referencing depends upon the use of ``tags,'' which are defined by +the user. The \cmd\label\marg{key} command is used to identify tags for +\revtex. Tags are strings of characters that serve to label section +headings, equations, tables, and figures that replace explicit, +by-hand numbering. + +Files that use cross-referencing (and almost all manuscripts do) +need to be processed through \revtex\ at least twice to +ensure that the tags have been properly linked to appropriate numbers. +If any tags are added in subsequent editing sessions, +\LaTeX{} will display a warning message in the log file that ends with +\texttt{... Rerun to get cross-references right}. +Running the file through \revtex\ again (possibly more than once) will +resolve the cross-references. If the error message persists, check +the labels; the same \marg{key} may have been used to label more than one +object. + +Another \LaTeX\ warning is \texttt{There were undefined references}, +which indicates the use of a key in a \cmd\ref\ without ever +using it in a \cmd\label\ statement. + +\revtex{} performs autonumbering exactly as in standard \LaTeX. +When the file is processed for the first time, +\LaTeX\ creates an auxiliary file (with the \file{.aux} extension) that +records the value of each \meta{key}. Each subsequent run retrieves +the proper number from the auxiliary file and updates the auxiliary +file. At the end of each run, any change in the value of a \meta{key} +produces a \LaTeX\ warning message. + +Note that with footnotes appearing in the bibliography, extra passes +of \LaTeX\ may be needed to resolve all cross-references. For +instance, putting a \cmd\cite\ inside a \cmd\footnote\ will require at +least three passes. + +Using the \classname{hyperref} package to create hyperlinked PDF files +will cause reference ranges to be expanded to list every +reference in the range. This behavior can be avoided by using the +\classname{hypernat} package available from \url{www.ctan.org}. + +\subsection{Acknowledgments} +Use the \env{acknowledgments} environment for an acknowledgments +section. Depending on the journal substyle, this element may be +formatted as an unnumbered section titled \textit{Acknowledgments} or +simply as a paragraph. Please note the spelling of +``acknowledgments.'' +\begin{verbatim} +\begin{acknowledgments} +The authors would like to thank... +\end{acknowledgments} +\end{verbatim} + +\subsection{Appendices} +The \cmd\appendix\ command signals that all following sections are +appendices, so \cmd\section\marg{title text} after \cmd\appendix\ will set +\marg{title text} as an appendix heading (an empty \marg{title text} +is permitted). For a single appendix, use a +\cmd\appendix\verb+*+ followed by \cmd\section\marg{title text} +command to suppress the appendix letter in the section heading. + +\subsection{\label{sec:lineno}Line numbering} +\revtex~4.2 provides the \classoption{linenumbers} class option to enable line numbering. While it is +possible to directly call in the \classname{lineno.sty}, using the class option ensures +that the default parameters needed to properly typeset the line numbers are set up correctly. It is +still possible for authors to override parameters such as \cmd\linenumbersep\ as usual, however. + +\section{Math and equations}\label{sec:math} + +\subsection{Math in text} + +Not surprisingly, \revtex\ uses the \TeX\ math \verb+$+ delimiters +for math embedded in text. For example, +\verb|$a^{z}$| gives $a^{z}$. Within math mode, use +\verb+^+\marg{math} for superscripts and +\verb+_+\marg{math} for subscripts. If the braces after the +\verb+^+ are omitted, \TeX{} will +superscript the next \emph{token} (generally a single character or +command). Thus it is safest to use explicit braces \verb+{}+. + +As with text, math should not require extensive explicit vertical or +horzontal motion commands, because \TeX\ calculates math spacing +itself automatically. In particular, explicit spacing around +relations (e.g., $=$) or operators (e.g., $+$) should be +unnecessary. These suggestions notwithstanding, some fine-tuning of +math is required in specific cases, see Chapter~18 in the \TeX +book\cite{TeXbook}. + +\subsection{Text in math}\label{sec:textinmath} + +There are times when normal, non-italic text needs to be inserted +into a math expression. The \cmd\text\marg{text} command is the +preferred method of accomplishing this. It produces regular text +\emph{and} scales correctly in superscripts: +\verb+$y=x \text{ for } x_{\text{e-p}}$+ gives +``$y=x \text{ for } x_{\text{e-p}}$''. To use the \cmd\text\ command, +the \classname{amsmath} package must be loaded: include a +\cmd\usepackage\aarg{\classname{amsmath}} command in the document +preamble or use the class option \classoption{amsmath}. Please note +that \revtex~4.2 requires version 2.0 or higher of \classname{amsmath}. + +Other common alternatives may be less desirable. Using the standard +\LaTeXe\ \cmd\mbox\marg{text} will give normal text, including a hyphen, +but will not scale correctly in superscripts: +\verb+$x_{\mbox{e-p}}$+ gives ``$x_{\mbox{e-p}}$''. +The \cmd\rm\ command +only switches to Roman font for math letters. It does not, for +example, handle hyphens correctly: +\verb+$$x_{\rm{e-p}}$+ gives ``$x_{\rm e-p}$''. But note that with +\cmd\textrm{}, it does work: \verb+$x_{\textrm{e-p}}$+ gives ``$x_{\textrm{e-p}}$''. + +\subsection{Displayed equations}\label{sec:dispmath} + +Equations are set centered in the column width or flush left depending +on the selected journal substyle. + +For the simplest type of displayed equation, a numbered, one-line +equation, use the \env{equation} environment. +\revtex\ takes care of the equation number% +---the number will be set below the equation if necessary. +Use \cmd\[\dots\cmd\] for a single, one-line unnumbered display equation. + +Use the \env{eqnarray} environment when more than one consecutive +equation occurs, putting each equation in a separate row of the +environment, and using \cmd\nonumber\ before the row end (\cmd\\) to +suppress the equation number where necessary. If the equations are +related to each other, align each on the respective relation operator +(such as $=$). + +When an equation is broken over lines or is continued over multiple +relation operators, it is called a multi-line or continued equation, +respectively; here, too, use the \env{eqnarray} environment. + +For a continued equation, align each row on the relation operator just +as with multiple equations, and use the \cmd\nonumber\ command to +suppress auto-numbering on broken lines. Also, use the starred form +of the row end (\cmd\\\verb+*+) to prevent a pagebreak at that +juncture. + +Short displayed equations that can appear together on a single line +separated by \cmd\qquad\ space may be placed in a single +\env{equation} environment. + +As explained in Section~\ref{sec:widetext}, occasionally in two-column +mode a long equation, in order to fit it in the narrow column width, +would need to be broken into so many lines that it would affect +readibility. Set it in a wide column using the \env{widetext} +environment. Then return to the normal text width as soon as +possible. + +The sample file \file{apssamp.tex} illustrates how to obtain each of +the above effects. + +\subsection{Numbering displayed equations} + +\revtex~4.2 automatically numbers equations. +For single-line and multi-line equations, use the +\env{equation} and \env{eqnarray} environments as described above. +For unnumbered single-line equations, use the \verb+\[+\dots\verb+\]+ +construction. The command \cmd\nonumber\ will suppress the numbering +on a single line of an +\env{eqnarray}. +For a multi-line equation with no equation numbers at all, +use the \env{eqnarray*} environment. + +A series of equations can be a labeled with a lettered sequence, +e.g., (3a), (3b), and (3c), by +putting the respective \env{equation} or \env{eqnarray} environment within a +\env{subequations} environment. +The \classname{amsmath} package (can be loaded with the +\classoption{amsmath} class option) is required for this. + +Use the command \cmd\tag\marg{number} to produce an idiosyncratic +equation number: $(1')$, for example. Numbers assigned by \cmd\tag\ +are completely independent of \revtex's automatic numbering. The +package \classname{amsmath} is required for using the \cmd\tag\ +command. Please +note that the use of the \texttt{tag} command may conflict with the use of the \classoption{hyperref} package +due an incompatibility between \classoption{amsmath} and \classoption{hyperref}. + +To have \revtex{} reset the equation numbers at the start of each section, +use the \classoption{eqsecnum} class option in the document preamble. + +See the sample file \file{apssamp.tex} for some examples. + +\subsection{Cross-referencing displayed equations} + +To refer to a numbered equation, use +the \cmd\label\marg{key} and \cmd\ref\marg{key} commands. +The \cmd\label\marg{key} command is used within the referenced equation +(on the desired line of the \env{eqnarray}, if a multi-line equation): +\begin{verbatim} +\begin{equation} + A=B \label{pauli} +\end{equation} + ... It follows from Eq.~(\ref{pauli}) +that this is the case ... +\begin{eqnarray} + A & = &B,\label{pauli2}\\ + A'& = &B' +\end{eqnarray} +\end{verbatim} +gives +\begin{equation} +A=B \label{pauli} +\end{equation} + ... It follows from Eq.~(\ref{pauli}) +that this is the case ... +\begin{eqnarray} +A & = &B,\label{pauli2}\\ +A'& = &B' +\end{eqnarray} + +Please note the parentheses surrounding the \cmd\ref\ command. +These are \emph{not} provided automatically and, thus, must be +explicitly incorporated. + +Numbers produced with \cmd\tag\ can also be cross-referenced by adding +a \cmd\label\ command after the \cmd\tag\ command. + +Using a \cmd\label\ after \envb{subequations} to reference the +\emph{general} number of the equations in the +\env{subequations} environment. For example, if +\begin{verbatim} +\begin{subequations} + \label{allequations} % notice location + \begin{eqnarray} + E&=&mc^2,\label{equationa} + \\ + E&=&mc^2,\label{equationb} + \\ + E&=&mc^2,\label{equationc} + \end{eqnarray} +\end{subequations} +\end{verbatim} +% +gives the output +\begin{subequations} +\label{allequations} % notice location +\begin{eqnarray} +E&=&mc^2,\label{equationa} +\\ +E&=&mc^2,\label{equationb} +\\ +E&=&mc^2,\label{equationc} +\end{eqnarray} +\end{subequations} +% +then \verb+Eq.~(\ref{allequations})+ gives ``Eq.~(\ref{allequations})''. + +{\bf Note:} incorrect cross-referencing will result if +\cmd\label\ is used in an unnumbered single-line equation +(i.e., within the \verb+\[+ and \verb+\]+ commands), +or if \cmd\label\ is used on a line of an eqnarray that is not being numbered +(i.e., a line that has a \cmd\nonumber). + +\subsection{Using the AMS packages \classoption{amsfonts}, +\classoption{amssymb}, and \classoption{amsmath}}\label{AMS} + +The American Mathematical Society's AMS-\LaTeX\ packages provided extra +fonts, symbols, and math markup that are quite convenient. \revtex~4.2 +supports the use of these packages directly. To use the \classoption{amsfonts}, +\classoption{amssymb}, and \classoption{amsmath} class options, +AMS-\LaTeX\ (and perhaps the additional AMS fonts) will need to be +installed. Please note that \revtex~4.2 requires version 2.0 or higher +of AMS-\LaTeX. These packages can be downloaded from +\url{http://www.ams.org/tex/}. + +There are two class options for accessing the AMS fonts: +\classoption{amsfonts} and \classoption{amssymb}. +The \classoption{amsfonts} option defines the \cmd\mathfrak\ and +\cmd\mathbb\ commands to switch to the Fraktur and +Blackboard Bold fonts, respectively. +These fonts are selected with the \cmd\mathfrak\ and \cmd\mathbb\ +font-switching commands: +\verb+${\mathfrak{G}}$+ gives a Fraktur ``$\mathfrak{G}$'' +and \verb+${\mathbb{Z}}$+ gives a Blackboard Bold ``$\mathbb{Z}$''. +\revtex{} does not currently support the use of the extra Euler fonts +(the AMS fonts starting with \texttt{eur} or \texttt{eus}) or the +Cyrillic fonts (the AMS fonts starting with \texttt{w}). + +The \classoption{amssymb} class option gives all the font +capabilities of the +\classoption{amsfonts} class option and further defines the commands +for many commonly used math symbols. These symbols will scale +correctly in superscripts and other places. See the AMS-\LaTeX\ +documentation for the complete list of symbols available. + +\subsection{Bold symbols in math}\label{sec:bboxamsfonts} + +\revtex~4.2 uses the standard \LaTeXe\ Bold Math (\classname{bm}) package as the +basis for creating bold symbols in math mode. As usual, this requires +an explicit \cmd\usepackage\aarg{\classname{bm}} in the document +preamble. The command +\cmd\bm\marg{symbol} makes \marg{symbol} bold in math mode, ensuring +that it is the correct size, even in superscripts. If the correct font +in the correct size is not available then result is the \marg{symbol} +set at the +correct size in lightface and a \LaTeXe\ warning that says +``\texttt{No boldmath typeface in this size}\dots''. Most bold special +characters will require that the AMS fonts be installed and the +\classoption{amsfonts} class option be invoked. + +\cmd\bm\ is the proper means to get bold Greek characters---upper- and +lowercase---and other symbols. +The following will come out bold with \cmd\bm: +normal math italic letters, numbers, +Greek letters (uppercase and lowercase), +small bracketing and operators, and \cmd\mathcal. Fraktur +characters will come out bold in a \cmd\bm; however, Blackboard Bold +requires using the \cmd\mathbb\ command rather than \cmd{\bm}. +The \classoption{amsfonts} option adds support for bold math +letters and symbols in smaller sizes and in superscripts when a +\cmd\bm\marg{symbol} is used. +For example, \verb+$\pi^{\bm{\pi}}$+ gives a bold +lowercase pi in the superscript position: $^{\pi\bm{\pi}}$. + +Note that \cmd\bm\marg{math} is a fragile command and, thus, should be +preceded by \cmd\protect\ in commands with moving arguments. + +\section{Footnotes} +\LaTeX's standard \cmd\footnote\ command is available in +\revtex~4.2. The footnote text can either appear at the bottom of a page or +as part of the bibliography. This choice can be controlled by two class options: +\classoption{footinbib} and \classoption{nofootinbib}. \revtex~4.2 +defaults to the former. Specific journal options may select a +different value than the default. + +Please note that even if Bib\TeX\ is not being used for the references, you +may have to run Bib\TeX\ if you are using footnotes without the \classoption{nofootinbib} option. +The log file will contain errors about missing references such as \texttt{Note1} in this case and a file ending in +\texttt{Notes.bib} will have been produced during the processing of the \TeX\ file. + +Note that in the latter case, the +argument of the +\cmd\footnote\ command is a moving argument in the sense of the \LUG, +Appendix~C.1.3: any fragile command within that argument must be +preceded by a \cmd\protect\ command. + +The \cmd\footnote\ macro \emph{should not} be used in the front +matter for indicating author/affiliation relationships or to provide +additional information about authors (such as an e-mail +address). See Section~\ref{sec:footau} for the proper way to do +this. + +Finally, footnotes that appear in tables behave differently. They +will be typeset as part of the table itself. See +Section~\ref{sec:tablenote} for details. + +\section{Citations and References}\label{sec:endnotes} + +\revtex~4.2 adds significant new functionality to \revtex~4's +typesetting of citations and references. The new functionality is +designed to make it easier to use Bib\TeX\ and produce the desired output +in the reference section without having to edit Bib\TeX's output. The new features include: +\begin{itemize} +\item Endnotes created with the \cmd\footnote\ command are automatically interleaved with the bibliographic references. \revtex~4 would typeset all endnotes at the end of the bibliography. +\item Combining multiple references automatically into a single entry in the bibliography. \revtex~4 required by-hand editing of Bib\TeX\ output. This is achieved by prepending an asterisk (*) to the reference's \textit{key} in the \cmd\cite\ command. \verb+\cite{{key1,*key2}+ would make a single entry in the bibliography by combining into one \cmd\bibitem\ the entries from the \texttt{.bib} file with keys \textit{key1} and \textit{key2}. See Section~\ref{sec:multiple} for more details. +\item Text can be prepended or appended to an entry in the bibliography. \revtex~4 required by-hand editing of the Bib\TeX\ output. See Section~\ref{sec:prepend} for an example of how to do this. +\end{itemize} + +Proper formatting of references requires Patrick Daly's \classname{natbib} citation package. \BibTeX\ style files +for APS and AIP journals are created using his \classname{custom-bib} tool kit. From an author's point of view, all this means is that a proper +\revtex~4.2 installation requires having \classname{natbib} (version 8.31a +or higher) installed. It also means that the full set of +\classname{natbib} functionality is available from within \revtex~4.2 +(but see the \textit{APS Author Guide for \revtex~4.2} and \textit{Author's Guide to AIP Substyles for \revtex~4.2} for restrictions if +submitting to an APS or AIP journal). The \classname{natbib} documentation contains many examples; see in +particular the \verb+natnotes.tex+ file for a convenient summary. Please also note that \classname{natbib 8.3} and later now gives an error (rather than merely a warning as in earlier versions) if you try to use a Bib\TeX\ file that isn't compatible with author-year style citations with a journal style that requires author-year citations (such as \textit{Reviews of Modern Physics}). + +\subsection{Citing a reference} +As in standard \LaTeX, references are cited in text using the +\cmd\cite\marg{key} command and are listed in the bibliography using +the \cmd\bibitem\marg{key} command. The \cmd\cite{} macro enables +\revtex~4.2 to automatically number the references in the manuscript. + +A typical example might be: +\begin{verbatim} +String theory\cite{GSW} attempts to +provide a theory of everything. +\end{verbatim} +The corresponding \cmd\bibitem{} would be: +\begin{verbatim} +\bibitem{GSW} M.~Greene, J.~Schwarz, and +E.~Witten, \textit{Superstring Theory: +Introduction}, (Cambridge University +Press, London, 1985). +\end{verbatim} + +Journals differ in how the \cmd\cite\ will be displayed. Most APS journals +display the citation in-line, as a number, enclosed in square brackets, +\textit{e.g.}, ``String theory[1] attempts\dots.'' Other journals +may instead use a number in a superscript: ``String theory$^{1}$ attempts\dots.'' +Selecting the journal substyle using a class option will invoke the appropriate style. +In journal substyles using superscripts, +the macro the \cmd\onlinecite\marg{key} is necessary to get the number +to appear on the baseline. +For example, ``String theory (see, for example, +\verb+Ref.~\onlinecite{GSW}+)'' will give the output +``String theory (see, for example, Ref.~1).'' + +The \cmd{\onlinecite} command has the same semantics as +\classname{natbib}'s \cmd{\citealp} command. + +A \cmd\cite\ command with multiple keys is formatted with consecutive +reference numbers collapsed; e.g., [1,2,3,5] will be output as +[1--3,5]. To split the list over more than one line, use +a \verb+%+ character immediately following a comma: +\begin{verbatim} +. . . \cite{a,b,c,d,e,f,% +g,h,i,j,k,l,m,n,o,p,q,r,s,t,u,v,w,x,y,z} +\end{verbatim} +The \verb+%+ avoids unwanted spaces. + +\subsection{Author/Year (Non-numeric) Citations} + +\textit{Reviews of Modern Physics} uses a citation style based on the +first author's last name and the year of the reference rather than a +simple number. Support for this style of citing references is the +primary reason \revtex~4.2 uses the \classname{natbib} +package. \classname{natbib} uses an optional argument to the +\cmd\bibitem\ macro to specify what text to use for the \cmd\cite\ +text: +\begin{quote} +\cmd\bibitem\verb+[+\meta{short-name}\verb+(+\meta{year}\verb+)+\meta{long-name}\verb+]+ +\end{quote} +where \meta{short-name} is the author name used in a parenthetical citation, +\meta{long-name} that used in a textual citation, and +\meta{year} is the year. More concretely, the \cmd\bibitem\ example +above would appear as +\begin{verbatim} +\bibitem[Greene et al.(1985)Green, +Schwarz, and Witten]{GSW} +M.~Greene, J.~Schwarz, and E.~Witten, +\textit{Superstring Theory}, +(Cambridge Press, London, 1985). +\end{verbatim} + +When the citation constitutes part of the grammar of the sentence, +the \cmd\textcite\marg{key} command may be used (analogous to the +\cmd\onlinecite\ command above). Both \cmd\textcite\ and +\cmd\onlinecite\ are built upon \classname{natbib}'s rich repertoire of +macros (\cmd\citep{}, \cmd\citet{}, etc.). These macros are available in +\revtex~4.2; however, APS authors must follow the +\textit{APS Author Guide for \revtex~4.2} +guidelines regarding \classname{natbib}'s macros. + +\subsection{Combined Author/Year and Numeric Citations} + +AIP's \textit{Journal of Mathematical Physics} uses a combined author/year and numerical citation style. \revtex~4.2 supports this referencing style. Please see the \textit{Author's Guide to AIP Substyles for \revtex~4.2} for more information about this style. + +\subsection{\label{sec:use-bib}Using Bib\TeX} + +The \cmd\bibitem{} entries can be coded by hand as above, of course, but the +use of \BibTeX\ with the new style files provided with \revtex~4.2 makes +it particularly simple to generate marked-up references that can, for +instance, take advantage of packages like +\classname{hyperref} for linking. They also save the trouble of having +to specify formatting like the italics for the book title in the above +example. And, for those wishing to use author/year citations, \BibTeX\ +will automatically generate the appropriate optional arguments for the +\cmd\bibitem\ commands. + +\BibTeX\ is an adjunct to \LaTeX\ that aids in the +preparation of bibliographies. \BibTeX\ allows authors to build up a +database or collection of bibliography entries that may be used for many +manuscripts. A \BibTeX\ style file then specifies how to transform the +entries into a proper \cmd\bibitem{} for a particular journal. Here we +give a brief summary of how to get started with \BibTeX. More details can be +found in the LaTeX books listed in the references. + +Selecting a journal style by using an appropriate class option will +automatically select the correct \BibTeX\ style file from those included in +\revtex~4.2. Five basic \BibTeX\ style files are included: \file{apsrev4-2.bst} (APS journals using a numeric citation style, \textit{i.e.}, all but RMP), \file{apsrmp4-2.bst} (author/year style citations for RMP), +\file{aipauth4-2.bst} (AIP journal using an author/year citation style), \file{aipnum4-2.bst} (AIP journals using a numeric citation style) and \file{aapmrev4-2.bst} for AAPM journals. The selection can be overridden by specifying an +alternative \file{.bst} file using the standard \LaTeXe +\cmd\bibliographystyle\ macro. This must appear in the preamble +before the \envb{document} line in \revtex~4.2 (this differs from +standard \LaTeX). + +The \BibTeX\ database files will contain entries such as: +\begin{verbatim} +@Book{GSW, + author=``M. Greene, J. Schwarz, + E. Witten'', + title=``Superstring theory: + Introduction'', + publisher=``Cambridge University + Press'', + address=``London'', + year=``1985'' +} +\end{verbatim} +There are entry formats for articles, technical reports, e-prints, +theses, books, proceedings, and articles that appear in books or +proceedings. The styles provided with +\revtex~4.2 also allows URL's and e-print identifiers to be specified +for any of the different entry types. There is also an additional +``collaboration'' field that can be used in addition to ``author'.' + +To actually create the bibliography in the manuscript, the +\cmd\bibliography\marg{bib files} macro is used. +Here \meta{bib files} is a comma-separated list of \BibTeX\ bibliography +database files, each with the \file{.bib} extension. The +\cmd\bibliography\ macro should be placed at the location where the +references are to appear (usually after the main body of the +paper). When the manuscript is processed with \LaTeX\ for the first +time, the keys corresponding for the \cmd\cite{} macros used in the +manuscript are written out to the \file{.aux} file. Then \BibTeX\ should +be run (if the manuscript is called \file{paper.tex}, the command would +be \verb+bibtex paper+. This will produce a \file{.bbl} file containing all +of the \cmd\bibitem{}'s for the manuscript. Subsequent runs of \LaTeXe\ +will call this file in to resolve the references. \LaTeXe\ should be run +repeatedly until all references are resolved. + +The \BibTeX-produced \cmd\bibitem{}'s created using the \revtex\ style files appear considerably more complex than the example given +above. This is because the style files add in \cmd\bibinfo{}, +\cmd\bibnamefont{}, \cmd\eprint{}, and \cmd\url{} macros for +specifying additional formatting and tagging. The \cmd\bibinfo\ macro +is mostly a do-nothing macro that serves merely to tag the information with +the field information from the original entry in the \BibTeX\ database. +The \cmd\eprint\ and \cmd\url\ macros can be used to create the +appropriate hyperlinks in target formats such as PDF. + +For more information on using \BibTeX\ with \LaTeX, see Sections~4.3.1 +and~C.11.3 of the \LUG\cite{LaTeXman}, Section~13.2 of \cite{Compan}, +or the online \BibTeX\ manual \file{btxdoc.tex} from +\url{http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/distribs/doc/}. + +\subsubsection{\texttt{arXiv.org} support} + +\revtex~4.2 supports citing e-prints from \texttt{arXiv.org} For instance, the \texttt{.bib} entry +\begin{verbatim} +@Unpublished{Ginsparg:1988ui, + author = "Ginsparg, Paul H.", + title = "{Applied Conformal Field Theory}", + year = "1988", + eprint = "hep-th/9108028", + archivePrefix = "arXiv", + SLACcitation = "%%CITATION=HEP-TH/9108028;%%" +} +\end{verbatim} +will include the arXiv.org e-print identifier as \texttt{arXiv:hep-th/9108028} and hyperlink it (if using \texttt{hyperref}). The newer format for arXiv identifiers with primary classifications will produce appropriate output For example, + +\begin{verbatim} +@Unpublished{Ginsparg:2014, + author = "Ginsparg, Paul", + title = "{Kenneth G. Wilson: Renormalized After-Dinner Anecdotes}", + year = "2014", + eprint = "1407.1855", + archivePrefix = "arXiv", + primaryClass = "physics.hist-ph", +} +\end{verbatim} +will generate \texttt{arXiv:1407.1855 [physics.hist-ph]} and hyperlink it. + +\subsubsection{\texttt{noeprint} option} +In the \revtex~4.2 Bib\TeX\ style files, the behavior of the \texttt{noeprint} option was changed to only suppress the arXiv identifiers for journal references, but keep them for e-print references. + +\subsubsection{\label{sec:datacitations}Citing data sets with a DOI} +Bib\TeX\ styles in \revtex~4.2 add support for citing data sets using the new Bib\TeX\ type \texttt{@dataset}: + +\begin{verbatim} +@dataset{haigh:2016, + author = "Haigh, J. A. and Lambert, N. J. and + Sharma, S. and Blanter, Y. and + Bauer, G. E. W. and Ramsay, A. J.", + year = "2018", + title = "{Data from Figures in``Selection rules + for cavity-enhanced Brillouin light scattering + from magnetostatic modes" [Data set]}", + doi = "10.5281/zenodo.1284434", + note = "{Zenodo}" +} +\end{verbatim} +This results in the formatted reference: ``J. A. Haigh, N. J. Lambert, S. Sharma, Y. Blanter, G. E. W. Bauer, and A. J. Ramsay, Data from Figures in ``Selection +rules for cavity-enhanced Brillouin light scattering from magnetostatic modes" [Data set], 10.5281/zenodo.1284434 (2018), +Zenodo." + +This is primarily intended for data sets that have a DOI assigned to them. + +\subsubsection{\label{sec:doiref}Journal references with only DOIs} +Some journals have moved to using only a volume and DOI to identify an article and do not assign page numbers or article identifiers. In the \texttt{apsrev.bst} Bib\TeX\ style file used for the \textit{Phys. Rev.} journals, If the \texttt{pages} field is absent from an entry in the \texttt{bib} file, but the \texttt{doi} field is present, the DOI will be explicitly displayed and linked in the formatted reference. + +\subsubsection{\label{sec:jhep}Journals that use the year and issue for unique citations} +The \texttt{apsrev.bst} style used for \textit{Phys. Rev.} journals now includes support for four journals that use the year in place of a volume and require an explicit issue to uniquely cite a paper: + +\begin{itemize} + \item J. High Energy Phys. + \item J. Cosmol. Astropart. Phys. + \item J. Instrum. + \item J. Stat. Mech.: Theory Exp. + \end{itemize} + + The Bib\TeX\ entry must \textbf{exactly} match one of the these four abbreviated journal names or use the corresponding macro, \texttt{jhep}, \texttt{jcap}, \texttt{jinst}, or \texttt{jstat}, resp., to invoke the proper formatting. For example: + +\begin{verbatim} +@Article{Cotogno2017, + author="Cotogno, Sabrina and van Daal, Tom + and Mulders, Piet J.", + title="Positivity bounds on gluon {TMDs} + for hadrons of spin $\le$ 1",, + journal=jhep, + year="2017", + month="Nov", + day="28", + volume="2017", + number="11", + pages="185", + doi="10.1007/JHEP11(2017)185", + url="https://doi.org/10.1007/JHEP11(2017)185" +} +\end{verbatim} +will be formatted as ``S. Cotogno, T. van Daal, and P. J. Mulders, Positivity bounds on gluon TMDs for hadrons of spin $\le$ 1, J. High Energy Phys. 2017 (11), 185." + +\subsection{\label{sec:multiple}Multiple references in a single bibliography entry} +\revtex~4.2 allows multiple references within a single bibliography entry when using Bib\TeX. This done by using a starred (*) argument to the \cmd\cite\ command, and it requires a compatible version of \texttt{natbib} and the \texttt{bst} files that come with \revtex~4.2. To combine multiple references into a single \cmd\bibitem, precede the second, third, etc. citation keys in the \cmd\cite\ command with an asterisk (*). For example \verb+\cite{bethe, *feynman, *bohr}+ will combine the \cmd\bibitem\relax s with keys \texttt{bethe}, \texttt{feynman}, and \texttt{bohr} into a single entry in the bibliography separated by semicolons. + +\subsection{\label{sec:prepend}Prepending and/or appending text to a citation} +The expanded syntax for the \cmd\cite\ command argument can also be used to specify text before and/or after a citation. For instance, a citation such as: +\begin{verbatim} +[19] A similar expression was derived in +A. V. Andreev, Phys. Rev. Lett. 99, 247204 +(2007) in the context of carbon nanotube +p-n junctions. The only difference is that no +integration over ky is present there. +\end{verbatim} +may be created by the following \cmd\cite\ command: +\begin{verbatim} +\cite{*[{A similar expression was derived +in }] [{ in the context of carbon nanotube +p-n junctions. The only difference is that +no integration over ky is present +there.}] andreev2007} +\end{verbatim} +Please note the use of curly braces to enclose the text within the square brackets as well as the spaces next to the brackets. + + + +\section{Figures and Artwork}\label{sec:figures} +\subsection{\texttt{figure} environment} + +Figures may be included into a \revtex~4.2 manuscript by using the +standard \LaTeXe\ macros. It should be noted that \LaTeXe\ includes +several powerful packages for including the files in various +formats. The two main packages are \classname{graphics} and +\classname{graphicx}. Both offer a macro called +\cmd\includegraphics\oarg{args}\marg{filename}; +they mainly differ in how arguments for +controlling figure scaling, translation, and orientation +are specified. For more information on the enhancements of the \classname{graphicx} package, +see \cite{CompanG} or the guide \file{grfguide.pdf} available at +\url{http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/}. +\revtex~4.2 no longer has the \classoption{epsf} class option, though +the \classname{epsfig} package provides a similar interface. + + +The \env{figure} environment should be used to add a caption to the figure and +to allow \LaTeX\ to number and place the figures where they fit best. +\LaTeX\ will label and automatically number the captions FIG.~1, +FIG.~2, etc. For example: +\begin{verbatim} +\begin{figure} + \includegraphics{fig1.eps} + \caption{\label{fig1}Text of first caption.} +\end{figure} +\end{verbatim} +Note how the \cmd\label\marg{key} command is used to cross-reference +figures in text. The \cmd\label\marg{key} command should be inserted +inside the figure caption. As usual, the \cmd\ref\marg{key} macro can +then by used to refer to the label: ``As depicted in +FIG.\verb+~\ref{fig1}+\dots''. + +Figures are normally set to the width of the column in +which they are placed. This means that in two-column mode, the figure +will be placed in a single, narrow column. For wide figures, the +\cmd\figure\verb+*+ environment should be used +instead. This will place the figure across both columns (the figure +usually will +appear either at the top or the bottom of the following page). + + +Captions less than one line long are centered under the figure, +otherwise they span the width of the figure. + +Note that is unnecessary (and undesirable) to use explicit centering +commands inside the float environments. + +\subsection{\texttt{video} environment} +Papers often refer to multimedia material such as videos. The \texttt{video} environment is identical to the \texttt{figure} environment, but the caption will be labeled as a \textbf{Video} (with its own counter independent of figures). A URL can also be specified so that the caption label can be linked to the online video (if using the \texttt{hyperref} package). The included graphic (using \cmd\includegraphics\ from the \texttt{graphics} or \texttt{graphicx} package) would be a representation frame from the video. A \texttt{\cmd\listofvideos} is also provided. For example: +\begin{verbatim} +\begin{video} +\includegraphics{videoframe.jpg} +\setfloatlink{http://some.video.com/fun.mov} +\caption{\label{vid:interest}This is a video +of something fun.} +\end{video} +\end{verbatim} +There is also a corresponding \cmd\listofvideos\ command. + +\section{Tables}\label{sec:tables} + +Tables are very similar to figures. They should be input using the +\env{table} environment as detailed below, and +\LaTeX\ will label and number the captions TABLE~1, TABLE~2, etc. +(or in whatever format required by the chosen journal +substyle). Tables without captions won't be numbered. + +Each table must begin with \envb{table}, end with \enve{table}. A +caption can be specified using the \cmd\caption\marg{text} command. +Captions less than one line long are centered under the figure, +otherwise they span the width of the figure. +To refer to the table via cross-referencing, a \cmd\label\marg{key} +command should appear within the \cmd{\caption}. Use the +\cmd\ref\marg{key} command to cite tables in text. The \env{table} +environment will set the table to the width of the column. Thus, in +two-column mode, the table will be confined to a single column. To set a +table to the full width of the page, rather than the column, use the +\env{table*} environment. + +The heart of the table is the +\env{tabular} environment. This will behave for the most part as in +standard \LaTeXe\ (please refer to Section~3.6.3 and Appendix~C.10.2 of the +\LUG{} for more details about the \env{tabular} environment). +Note that \revtex~4.2 no longer automatically adds double (Scotch) rules +around tables. Nor does the \env{tabular} environment set various +table parameters for column spacing as before. Instead, a new +environment \env{ruledtabular} provides this functionality. This +environment should surround the \env{tabular} environment: +\begin{verbatim} +\begin{table} +\caption{\label{<key>}....} +\begin{ruledtabular} +\begin{tabular} +... +\end{tabular} +\end{ruledtabular} +\end{table} +\end{verbatim} + +A basic table looks as follows: +\begin{verbatim} +\begin{table} +\caption{\label{tab:ex}Text of table caption.} +\begin{ruledtabular} +\begin{tabular}{ll} + Heading 1 & Heading 2\\ + Cell 1 & Cell 2\\ +\end{tabular} +\end{ruledtabular} +\end{table} +\end{verbatim} + +The \env{quasitable} environment is no longer in \revtex~4.2. The +standard \env{tabular} environment can be used instead because it +no longer puts in the double rules. + +\subsection{Aligning on a decimal point} +Numerical columns should align on the decimal point (or +decimal points if more than one is is present). This is accomplished +by again using a standard \LaTeXe\ package, \classname{dcolumn} which +must be loaded in the manuscript's preamble: +\begin{verbatim} +\usepackage{dcolumn} +\end{verbatim} +Once this package is loaded, the column specifier `\texttt{d}' can be +used in the table's \env{tabular}\marg{preamble} enviroment preamble. +The `\texttt{d}' should be used for simple numeric data with a single +decimal point. +% +The entry of a \texttt{d} column is typeset in math mode; do not +insert any \verb+$+ math delimiters into a `\texttt{d}' column. Items +without a decimal point are simply set in math mode, centered. If +text is required in the column, use \cmd\text\ or \cmd\mbox\ as +appropriate. If multiple decimal points are present then the last is +used for alignment. To escape from the `\texttt{d}' column use +\cmd\multicolumn\ as usual. See the sample file \file{apssamp.tex} for examples. + +\subsection{Footnotes in Tables}\label{sec:tablenote} + +Footnotes in a table are labeled \emph{a}, \emph{b}, \emph{c}, +etc. They can be specified by using the \LaTeX\ \cmd\footnote\ +command. Furthermore, +\cmd\footnotemark\ and \cmd\footnotetext\ can be used so that multiple entries +can to refer to the same footnote. The footnotes for a table are typeset +at the bottom of the table, rather than at the bottom of the page or +at the end of the references. The arguments for \cmd\footnotemark\ and +\cmd\footnotetext\ should be numbers 1, 2, \dots. The journal style +will convert these to letters. See sample file \file{apssamp.tex} for +examples and explanations of use. + +\subsection{Dealing with Long Tables} +By default, tables are set in a smaller size than the text body +(\cmd\small). The \cmd\squeezetable\ declaration makes the table font +smaller still (\cmd\scriptsize). Thus, putting the +\cmd\squeezetable\ command before the \envb{table} line in a table +will reduce the font size. If this isn't sufficient to fit +the table on a page, the standard \LaTeXe\ \classname{longtable} +package may be used. The scope of the +\cmd\squeezetable\ command must be limited by enclosing it with a group: +\begin{verbatim} +\begingroup +\squeezetable +\begin{table} +[...] +\end{table} +\endgroup +\end{verbatim} + +Tables are normally set to the width of the column in +which they are placed. This means that in two-column mode, the table +will be placed in a single, narrow column. For wide tables, the +\cmd\table\verb+*+ environment should be used +instead. This will place the table across both columns (the table +usually will +appear either at the top or the bottom of the following page). + + +To break tables across pages, \revtex~4.2 requires adding to the +table a float placement option of [H] (meaning put the table ``here'' +and effectively ``unfloating'' the table) to the \envb{table} +command. The commands \verb+\\*+ and \cmd{\samepage} can be used to +control where the page breaks occur (these are the same as for the +\env{eqnarray} environment). + +Long tables are more robustly handled by using the +\classname{longtable.sty} package included with the standard \LaTeXe\ +distribution (put \verb+\usepackage{longtable}+ in the preamble). This +package gives precise control over the layout of the table. +The \revtex~4.2 package contains patches that enable the +\classname{longtable} package to work in two-column mode. Of course, a +table set in two-column mode needs to be narrow enough to fit within +the column. Otherwise, the columns may overlap. \revtex~4.2 provides +an additional environment \env{longtable*} which allows a longtable to +span the whole page width. Currently, the \env{longtable*} and +\env{ruledtabular} environments are incompatible. In order to get the +double (Scotch) rule, it is necessary to add the \verb+\hline\hline+ +manually (or define \verb+\endfirsthead+ and \verb+\endlastfoot+ +appropriately). For more documentation on the \env{longtable} +environment and on the package options of the +\classname{longtable} package, please see the documentation available at +\url{http://www.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/tools/longtable.dtx} or +refer to \cite{Compan}. + +\section{Placement of Figures, Tables, and Other Floats} +\label{sec:place} + +By default, figures and tables (and any other ``floating'' environments +defined by other packages) float to the top or bottom of the page +using the standard \LaTeX\ float placement mechanism. Initially, each +\env{figure} or \env{table} environment should be put immediately +following its first reference in the text; this will usually result in +satisfactory placement on the page. An optional argument for either +environment adjusts the float placement. For example: +\begin{quote} +\envb{figure}\oarg{placement}\\ +\dots\\ +\enve{figure} +\end{quote} +where \meta{placement} can be any combination of \verb|htbp!|, signifying +``here'', ``top'', ``bottom'', ``page'', and ``as soon as possible'', +respectively. The same placement argument may be added to a +\envb{table}. For more details about float placement, +see the instructions in the \LUG, Appendix~C.9.1. + +In two-column mode, a page may contain both a \env{widetext} +environment and a float. \revtex~4.2 may not always be able to +automatically put the float in the optimal place. For instance, a +float may be placed at the bottom of a column just before the +\env{widetext} begins. To workaround this, try moving the float +environment below the \env{widetext} environment. Alternative +\meta{placements} may also alleviate the problem. + +\env{figure} and \env{table} environments should not +be enclosed in a \env{widetext} environment to make them span +the page to accommodate wide figures or tables. Rather, the +\env{figure*} or \env{table*} environments should be used instead. + +Sometimes in \LaTeX\ the float placement mechanism breaks down and a +float can't be placed. Such a ``stuck'' float may mean that it and all +floats that follow are moved to the end of the job (and if there are +too many of floats, the fatal error \texttt{Too many unprocessed floats} +will occur). \revtex~4.2 provides the class option +\classoption{floatfix} which attempts to invoke emergency float +processing to avoid creating a ``stuck'' float. \revtex~4.2 will provide +a message suggesting the use of +\classoption{floatfix}. If \classoption{floatfix} doesn't work or if +the resulting positioning of the float is poor, the float should be +repositioned by hand. + +\revtex~4.2 offers an additional possibility for placing the floats. By +using the either the \classoption{endfloats} or the +\classoption{endfloats*} class option all floats may be held +back (using an external file) and then set elsewhere in the document +using the the commands \cmd\printtables\ and \cmd\printfigures{}, +placed where the tables and figures are to be printed (usually at the +end of the document). (This is similar to the standard +\cmd\printindex\ command). Using a \texttt{*}-form of the commands +(\cmd\printfigures\verb+*+ and +\cmd\printtables\verb+*+) will begin the figures +or tables on a new page. Alternatively, the option +\classoption{endfloats*} may be used to change the behavior of the +non-\texttt{*}-forms so that every float will appear on a separate +page at the end. + +Without one of the \classoption{endfloats} class options, these float +placement commands are silently ignored, so it is always safe to use +them. If one of the \classoption{endfloats} class options is given, +but the \cmd\printtables\ command is missing, the tables will be +printed at the end of the document. Likewise, if \cmd\printfigures\ is +missing, the figures will be printed at the end of the document. +Therefore it is also safe to omit these commands as long as \revtex's +default choices for ordering figures and tables are satisfactory. + +The \classoption{endfloats} option (or perhaps some journal substyle +that invokes it), requires explicit \envb{figure}, \enve{figure}, +\envb{table}, and \enve{table} lines. In particular, do \emph{not} +define typing shortcuts for table and figure environments, such as +\begin{verbatim} +\def\bt{\begin{table}}% Incompatible! +\def\et{\end{table}}% +\end{verbatim} + +Please note that it is generally undesirable to have all floats moved +to the end of the manuscript. APS no longer requires this for +submissions. In fact, the editors and referees will have an easier time +reading the paper if the floats are set in their normal positions. + +\section{Rotating Floats} + +Often a figure or table is too wide to be typeset in the standard +orientation and it is necessary to rotate the float 90 +degrees. \revtex~4.2 provides a new environment \env{turnpage} as an +easy means to accomplish this. The \env{turnpage} environment depends +on one of the packages \classname{graphics} or \classname{graphicx} +being loaded. To use the \env{turnpage} environment, simply enclose +the \env{figure} or \env{table} environment with the \env{turnpage} +environment: +\begin{verbatim} +\documentclass[...]{revtex4-2} +\usepackage{graphicx} +[...] +\begin{turnpage} +\begin{figure} or \begin{table} +[...] +\end{figure} or \end{table} +\end{turnpage} +\end{verbatim} +A turnpage float will be typeset on a page by itself. Currently, there +is no mechanism for breaking such a float across multiple pages. + +\section{\revtex~4.2 symbols and the \classname{revsymb4-2} package} + +Symbols made available in earlier versions of \revtex\ are +defined in a separate package, \classname{revsymb4-2}, +so that they may be used with other classes. +This might be useful if, say, copying text from a \revtex\ document to +a non-\revtex\ document. \revtex~4.2 automatically includes these +symbols so it is not necessary to explicitly call them in with a +\cmd\usepackage\ statement. + +Table~\ref{tab:revsymb} summarizes the symbols defined in this package. +Note that \cmd{\overcirc}, \cmd{\overdots}, and \cmd{\corresponds} are +no longer in \revtex~4.2. Use \cmd{\mathring} (standard in \LaTeXe), +\cmd{\dddot} (with the \classoption{amsmath} package loaded), and +\cmd\triangleq\ (with the \classoption{amssymb} class option) respectively. +\cmd{\succsim}, \cmd{\precsim}, \cmd{\lesssim}, and \cmd{\gtrsim} are +also defined either in \classname{amsmath} or \classname{amssymb}. The +AMS versions of these commands will be used if the appropriate AMS +package is loaded. + +\begin{table} +\caption{\label{tab:revsymb}Special \revtex~4.2 symbols, accents, and +boldfaced parentheses defined in \file{revsymb.sty}} +\begin{ruledtabular} +\begin{tabular}{ll|ll} +\cmd\lambdabar & $\lambdabar$ &\cmd\openone & $\openone$\\ +\cmd\altsuccsim & $\altsuccsim$ & \cmd\altprecsim & $\altprecsim$ \\ +\cmd\alt & $\alt$ & \cmd\agt & $\agt$ \\ +\cmd\tensor\ x & $\tensor x$ & \cmd\overstar\ x & $\overstar x$ \\ +\cmd\loarrow\ x & $\loarrow x$ & \cmd\roarrow\ x & $\roarrow x$ \\ +\cmd\biglb\ ( \cmd\bigrb ) & $\biglb( \bigrb)$ & +\cmd\Biglb\ ( \cmd\Bigrb )& $\Biglb( \Bigrb)$ \\ +& & \\ +\cmd\bigglb\ ( \cmd\biggrb ) & $\bigglb( \biggrb)$ & +\cmd\Bigglb\ ( \cmd\Biggrb\ ) & $\Bigglb( \Biggrb)$ \\ +\end{tabular} +\end{ruledtabular} +\end{table} + +\section{Other \revtex~4.2 Features} +%\subsection{Hooks} +%To be written.... + +\subsection{Job-specific Override Files} +\revtex~4.2 allows manuscript-specific macro definitions to be put +in a file separate from the main \TeX\ file. One merely creates a file +with the same basename as the \TeX\ file, but with the extension +`.rty'. Thus, if the \TeX\ file is names man.tex, the macro +definitions would go in man.rty. Note that the .rty file should be in +the same directory as the \TeX\ file. APS authors should follow the +guidelines in the \textit{APS Author Guide for \revtex~4.2} when +submitting. Similarly, AIP authors should refer to the \textit{Author's Guide to AIP Substyles for \revtex~4.2} + + +\begin{thebibliography}{}\label{sec:TeXbooks} +\bibitem[Knuth(1986)]{TeXbook} D.E. Knuth, \emph{The \TeX book}, +(Addison-Wesley, Reading, MA, 1986). +\bibitem[Lamport(1996)]{LaTeXman} L. Lamport, \emph{\LaTeX, a Document +Preparation System}, (Addison-Wesley, Reading, MA, 1996). +\bibitem[Kopka(1995)]{Guide} H. Kopka and P. Daly, \emph{A Guide to +\LaTeXe}, (Addison-Wesley, Reading, MA, 1995). +\bibitem[Goossens(1994)]{Compan} M. Goossens, F. Mittelbach, and +A. Samarin, \emph{The \LaTeX\ +Companion}, (Addison-Wesley, Reading, MA, 1994). +\bibitem[Goossens(1997)]{CompanG} M. Goossens, S. Rahtz, and +F. Mittelbach, \emph{The +\LaTeX\ Graphics Companion}, (Addison-Wesley, Reading, MA, 1997). +\bibitem[Rahtz(1999)]{CompanW} S. Rahtz, M. Goossens, \emph{et +al.},\emph{The \LaTeX\ Web Companion}, (Addison-Wesley, Reading, MA, 1999). +\end{thebibliography} + +\end{document} + diff --git a/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/docs.sty b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/docs.sty new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f401506 --- /dev/null +++ b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/docs.sty @@ -0,0 +1,129 @@ +% authguide.rty - macros for processing revguide.tex under \documentclass{revtex4} +% Text entities +\DeclareRobustCommand\SNG{\emph{Physical Review Style and Notation Guide}} +\DeclareRobustCommand\LUG{\emph{\LaTeX{} User's Guide \& Reference Manual}} +\DeclareRobustCommand\revtex{REV\TeX} +\DeclareRobustCommand\marglat{\marginpar[\textbf{2e}]{\textbf{2e}}} +\DeclareRobustCommand\margrev{\marginpar[\textbf{4}]{\textbf{4}}} +\DeclareRobustCommand\AmS{% + {\protect\the\textfont\tw@ A\kern-.1667em\lower.5ex\hbox{M}\kern-.125emS}% +}% +\DeclareRobustCommand\AmSLaTeX{\AmS-\LaTeX} +\DeclareRobustCommand\BibTeX{{\rm B}{\sc ib}\TeX} +% +% Various forms of self-indexing commands: +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareRobustCommand{\m}[1]{% + \meta{#1}% + \index{#1=\string\meta{#1} placeholder}\index{placeholder>#1=\string\meta{#1}}% +}% +\DeclareRobustCommand\meta[1]{% + \mbox{\m@th\LANGLE\itshape#1\/\RANGLE}% +}% +\def\LANGLE{$\langle$}% +\def\RANGLE{$\rangle$}% +\DeclareRobustCommand{\marg}[1]{% + {\ttfamily\string{}\meta{#1}{\ttfamily\string}}% + \index{#1=\string\ttt{#1}, argument}\index{argument>#1=\string\ttt{#1}}% +}% +\DeclareRobustCommand{\aarg}[1]{% + {\ttfamily\string{}#1{\ttfamily\string}}% +}% +\let\oarg\undefined +\DeclareRobustCommand{\oarg}[1]{% + {\ttfamily[%] + }\meta{#1}{\ttfamily%[ + ]}% + \index{#1=\string\ttt{#1}, optional argument}% + \index{argument, optional>#1=\string\ttt{#1}}% +}% +\DeclareRobustCommand\cmd{\begingroup\makeatletter\@cmd}% +\long\def\@cmd#1{% + \endgroup + \cs{\expandafter\cmd@to@cs\string#1}% + \expandafter\cmd@to@index\string#1\@nil +}% +\def\cmd@to@cs#1#2{\char\number`#2\relax}% +\def\cmd@to@index#1#2\@nil{% + \index{#2=\string\cmd#1#2}%\index{command>#2=\string\cmd#1#2}% +}% +\DeclareRobustCommand\cs[1]{{\ttfamily\char`\\#1}}% +\def\scmd#1{% + \cs{\expandafter\cmd@to@cs\string#1}% + \expandafter\scmd@to@index\string#1\@nil +}% +\def\scmd@to@index#1#2\@nil#3{% + \index{\string$#3=\string\cmd#1#2---#3}% +%\index{command>\string$#3=\string\cmd#1#2---#3}% +}% +\DeclareRobustCommand\env{\name@idx{environment}}% +\DeclareRobustCommand\envb[1]{% + {\ttfamily\string\begin\string{}\env{#1}{\ttfamily\string}}% +}% +\DeclareRobustCommand\enve[1]{{\ttfamily\string\end\string{}\env{#1}{\ttfamily\string}}}% +\DeclareRobustCommand*{\file}[1]{% + {\ttfamily#1}% + \index{#1=\string\ttt{#1}}\index{file>#1=\string\ttt{#1}}% +}% +\DeclareRobustCommand\substyle{\name@idx{document substyle}}% +\DeclareRobustCommand\classoption{\name@idx{document class option}}% +\DeclareRobustCommand\classname{\name@idx{document class}}% +\def\name@idx#1#2{% + {\ttfamily#2}% + \index{#2\space#1=\string\ttt{#2}\space#1}\index{#1>#2=\string\ttt{#2}}% +}% +% +% Needed for index: +% +\def\ttt{\texttt}% +\def\pfill{\ }% +\def\efill{\ }% +\let\scan@allowedfalse\relax +%\makeindex +\AtEndDocument{\@input@{\jobname.ind}\null}% +% +% Processing options +% +% +% Layout: override revtex4|aps +\c@secnumdepth2 +\prepdef\@verbatim{\topsep.5\baselineskip}% +\renewenvironment{quotation}{% + \list{}{% + \listparindent 10\p@ + \itemindent\listparindent + \leftmargin10\p@ + \rightmargin\leftmargin + \parsep \z@ \@plus\p@ + \small + }% + \item[]% +}{% + \endlist +}% +\renewenvironment{quote}{% + \list{}{% + \leftmargin\z@ + \rightmargin\leftmargin + }\item[]% +}{% + \endlist +}% +\leftmargini\parindent +\def\descriptionlabel#1{% + \hspace\labelsep\ignorespaces + #1\unskip +}% +\def\toprule{\hline\hline\frstrut}% +\def\colrule{\hline\frstrut}% +\def\frstrut{\vrule height2.5ex width\z@ depth\z@\relax}% +\def\lrstrut{\vrule height\z@ width\z@ depth.5ex\relax}% +% +% Klootches +% +\let\savenofiles\nofiles +% +% Patches: +% +% +\endinput diff --git a/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/summary4-2.pdf b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/summary4-2.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..4738c9f --- /dev/null +++ b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/summary4-2.pdf diff --git a/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/summary4-2.tex b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/summary4-2.tex new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7ba76a1 --- /dev/null +++ b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/summary4-2.tex @@ -0,0 +1,372 @@ +%% ****** Start of file summary4-2.tex ****** % +%% +%% This file is part of the APS files in the REVTeX 4 distribution. +%% Version 4.2b of REVTeX, January, 2019 +%% +%% Copyright (c) 2019 American Physical Society. +%% +%% See the REVTeX 4.2 README file for restrictions and more information. +%% +\listfiles +\documentclass[% +twocolumn,secnumarabic,amssymb, amsmath, nofootinbib,tightenlines, +nobibnotes, aps, +prl, +%outputdebug, +]{revtex4-2} +%\usepackage{amsmath}% +\usepackage{longtable}% +\usepackage{bm}% +\usepackage{docs} +%\usepackage[colorlinks=true,linkcolor=blue]{hyperref}% +%\nofiles +\expandafter\ifx\csname package@font\endcsname\relax\else + \expandafter\expandafter + \expandafter\usepackage + \expandafter\expandafter + \expandafter{\csname package@font\endcsname}% +\fi + +\begin{document} + +\title[Command Option Summary]{\revtex~4.2 Command and Options Summary}% + +\author{American Physical Society}% +\email{revtex@aps.org} +\affiliation{1 Research Road, Ridge, NY 11961} +\date{December 2018}% +\maketitle + +This is the \textit{\revtex~4.2 Command and Options Summary}. It details +usage for many of the commands and options that are available in +\revtex~4.2. Please see the \textit{\revtex~4.2 Author's Guide} for +complete information on how to use \revtex~4.2. Class options for the +\verb+\documentclass+ line are marked with square +brackets. Environments are indicated by \verb+\begin{<env>}+ and always +require a matching \verb+\end{<env>}+. + +\setlength\LTleft{0pt} +\setlength\LTright{0pt} +% +\begin{longtable*}{@{\extracolsep{0in}}p{3in}p{4in}} +\caption{\label{tab:summary}\revtex~4.2 Command Summary}\\* +% +\noalign{\vspace{3pt}}% +\toprule\rule{0pt}{12pt} +\textbf{\revtex~4/\LaTeXe\ Markup}&\textbf{Details and Usage}\\*[3pt] +\endfirsthead +% +\multicolumn{2}{c}{TABLE~\ref{tab:summary} (continued): \revtex~4.2 Command Summary}% +\rule{0pt}{12pt}\\[3pt] +\colrule\rule{0pt}{12pt} +\textbf{\revtex~4/\LaTeXe\ Markup}&\textbf{Details and Usage}\\*[3pt] +\endhead +% +\noalign{\nobreak\vspace{3pt}}% +\colrule +\endfoot +% +\noalign{\nobreak\vspace{3pt}}% +\botrule +\endlastfoot +% +\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textsc{Frequently Used Class Options}\rule[-6pt]{0pt}{18pt}}\\* +\verb+[aps]+ & \textit{American Physical Society} styling. Default.\\ +\verb+[aip]+ & \textit{American Institute of Physics} styling.\\ +\verb+[aapm]+ & \textit{American Association of Physicists in Medicine} styling.\\ +\verb+[sor]+ & \textit{Society of Rheology} styling.\\ +\verb+[prl]+, \verb+[pra]+, \verb+[prb]+, \verb+[prc]+, \verb+[prd]+, \verb+[pre]+, \verb+[prab]+, \verb+[prper]+, \verb+[prx]+, \verb+[prapplied]+, \verb+[prfluids]+, \verb+[prmaterials]+, \verb+[physrev]+, \verb+[rmp]+& Further customize \verb+[aps]+ styling for APS journals.\\ +\verb+[apl]+, \verb+[bmf]+, \verb+[cha]+, \verb+[jap]+, \verb+[jcp]+, \verb+[jmp]+, \verb+[rse]+, \verb+[pof]+, \verb+[pop]+, \verb+[rsi]+, \verb+[apm]+, \verb+[adv]+, \verb+[sd]+& Further customize \verb+[aip]+ styling for AIP journals.\\ +\verb+[mph]+& Further customize \verb+[aapm]+ styling for AAPM journals.\\ +\verb+[jor]+& Further customize \verb+[sor]+ styling for SOR journals.\\ +\verb+[twocolumn]+ & Two-column formatting.\\ +\verb+[onecolumn]+ & Single-column formatting.\\ +\verb+[preprint]+ & Single-column formatting with increased interline spacing.\\ +\verb+[reprint]+ & Closely approximate a given journal's style. Can be either single or two-column formatting depending on the journal.\\ +\verb+[10pt]+, \verb+[11pt]+, \verb+[12pt]+ & Set font size. \verb+[preprint]+ gives \verb+[12pt]+, \verb+[twocolumn]+ gives +\verb+[10pt]+ by default.\\ +\verb+[groupedaddress]+ & Group authors with same affiliations together. Default. \\ +\verb+[superscriptaddress]+ & Associate authors with affiliations via superscript numbers. Appropriate for collaborations or if several authors share some, but not all, affiliations.\\ +\verb+[draft]+ & Mark overfull lines.\\ +\verb+[linenumbers]+ & Number lines (requires lineno.sty).\\ +\verb+[longbibliography]+ & Use alternative Bib\TeX\ style files that show journal article titles in the bibliography. (Unnecessary in 4.2.)\\ +\verb+[amsfonts]+, \verb+[noamsfonts]+ & Load (don't load) +\verb+amsfonts+ package. Adds AMS font support.\\ +\verb+[amssymb]+, \verb+[noamssymb]+ & Load (don't load) +\verb+amssymb+ package. Adds additional AMS symbols.\\ +\verb+[amsmath]+, \verb+[noamsmath]+ & Load (don't load) +\verb+amsmath+ package. Adds AMS-\LaTeX\ features.\\ +% +\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textsc{Other Class Options}\rule[-6pt]{0pt}{18pt}}\\* +\verb+[preprintnumbers]+, \verb+[nopreprintnumbers]+ & Control display of preprint numbers given by \verb+\preprint+ command. \verb+[preprintnumbers]+ is default for \verb+[preprint]+; otherwise \verb+[nopreprintnumbers]+ is default.\\ +\verb+[floatfix]+ & Invoke emergency processing to avoid the \LaTeX\ error \verb+``Too many unprocessed floats''+ or all subsequent floats being moved to the end of the job. \revtex~4 will display a message recommending this option if warranted.\\ +\verb+[bibnotes]+, \verb+[nobibnotes]+ & Control location of author footnotes. Default varies with journal style.\\ +\verb+[footinbib]+, \verb+[nofootinbib]+ & Control location of footnotes. Default varies with journal style.\\ +\verb+[eprint]+, \verb+[noeprint]+ & Control display of arXiv e-print identifiers in bibliography. Default and behavior vary with journal sty.\\ +\verb+[altaffilletter]+, \verb+[altaffillsymbol]+ & Use letters or symbols for +\verb+\altaffiliation+ superscripts. \verb+[altaffillsymbol]+ is default.\\ +\verb+[unsortedaddress]+ & Like \verb+[groupedaddress]+, but doesn't combine authors together who share the same affiliations.\\ +\verb+[runinaddress]+ & Like \verb+[groupedaddress]+, but joins multiple affiliations together into a single sequence separated by commas.\\ +\verb+[showkeys]+, \verb+[noshowkeyws]+ & Control display of Keywords: line.\\ +\verb+[tightenlines]+ & Single space manuscript (for use with \verb+[preprint]+).\\ +\verb+[floats]+ & Position floats near call outs. Default.\\ +\verb+[endfloats]+ & Move all floats to the end of the document.\\ +\verb+[endfloats*]+ & Move all floats to the end of the document and put each on a separate page.\\ +\verb+[titlepage]+, \verb+[notitlepage]+ & Control appearance of title page.\\ +\verb+[final]+ & Don't mark overfull lines. Default.\\ +\verb+[letterpaper]+, \verb+[a4paper]+, \verb+[a5paper]+ & Select paper size. \verb+[letterpaper]+ is default.\\ +\verb+[oneside]+, \verb+[twoside]+ & Control book syle layout. \verb+[oneside]+ is default.\\ +\verb+[fleqn]+ & Flush displayed equations left. \\ +\verb+[eqsecnum]+ & Number equations by section.\\ +\verb+[balancelastpage]+, \verb+[nobalancelastpage]+ & Control +\verb+[twocolumn]+ balancing on last page. \verb+[balancelastpage]+ is default.\\ +\verb+[raggedbottom]+, \verb+[flushbottom]+ & Control \verb+[twocolumn]+ balancing. \verb+[flushbottom]+ is default.\\ +\verb+[raggedfooter]+, \verb+[noraggedfooter]+ & Control positioning of footer. \verb+[noraggedfooter]+ is default.\\ +\verb+[byrevtex]+ & Display ``Typeset by \revtex~4''.\\ +\verb+[citeautoscript]+ & Fix up spacing and punctuation when switching from non-superscript style citations to superscript citation styles. \verb+\cite+ commands and associated spacing and punctuation should be as for the non-superscript style.\\ +\verb+[galley]+ & Typeset in a single narrow column.\\ +\verb+[nomerge]+ & Allows processing of legacy documents that use square brackets as part of the key in a \verb+cite+ command.\\ +% +\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textsc{Frontmatter Commands}\rule[-6pt]{0pt}{18pt}}\\* +\verb+\title{<title>}+ & The manuscript title.\\ +\verb+\author{One Author}+ & Specify one author's name.\\ +\verb+\surname{Lloyd Weber}+, \verb+\surname{Mao}+ & Indicate which part of a name within +\verb+\author+ should be used for alphabetizing and indexing.\\ +\verb+\email[<optional text>]{author@any.edu}+& Specify an e-mail address for an author.\\ +\verb+\homepage[<optional text>]+ \verb+ {http://any.edu/homepage/}+& Specify a URL for an author's web site.\\ +\verb+\altaffiliation[optional text]+ \verb+ {affiliation information}+&Specify an alternate or temporary address for an author.\\ +\verb+\thanks{text}+& Additional information about an author not covered by the more specific macros above.\\ +\verb+\collaboration{<The Collaboration>}+ & Specify a collaboration name for a group of authors. Should be placed after the authors. \\ +\verb+\affiliation{text}+ & Specify a single affiliation. Applies to all previous authors without a specified affiliation.\\ +\verb+\noaffiliation+ & For an author or collaboration without an affiliation.\\ +\verb+\date{<date>}+ & Show the date on the manuscript. \verb+\date{\today}+ gives the current date.\\ +\verb+\begin{abstract}+ & Start the manuscript's abstract. Must appear before \verb+\maketitle+ command.\\ +\verb+\keywords{<keywords>}+ & Suggested keywords for indexing.\\ +\verb+\preprint{<report number>}+ & Specify an institutional report number to appear in the upper-righthand corner of the first page. Multiple +\verb+\preprint+ macros may be supplied, but space may limit how many can appear.\\ +\verb+\maketitle+ & Typeset the title/author/abstract block.\\ +% +\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textsc{Sectioning Commands}\rule[-6pt]{0pt}{18pt}}\\* +\verb+\section{<heading>}, \subsection{<heading>}+, +\verb+\subsubsection{<heading>}+ & Start a new section or subsection.\\ +\verb+\section*{<heading>}+ & Start a new section without a number.\\ +\verb+\appendix+ & Makes all following sections appendices.\\ +\verb+\appendix*+ & Signifies there is a single appendix section to follow.\\ +\verb+\begin{acknowledgments}+ & Start an Acknowledgments section. Note spelling.\\ +\verb+\lowercase{<text>}+ & Escape a letter or word from being uppercased in a top-level \verb+\section+ heading.\\ +% +\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textsc{Citation, Footnote, and Cross-referencing Commands}\rule[-6pt]{0pt}{18pt}}\\* +\verb+\bibliography{<bib file basename>}+ & Specify a list of .bib +files in which to find references. Read in the resulting .bbl file. For use with Bib\TeX\ . \\ +\verb+\bibliographystyle{<bst stylefile>}+ & Specify a Bib\TeX\ (.bst) style file to use. APS journal options select the proper default (\texttt{apsrev} or \texttt{apsrmp}).\\ +\verb+\begin{thebibliography}+ & Start the reference section (when not using Bib\TeX). \\ +\verb+\bibitem[<optional text>]{<key>}+ & Specify a single reference.\\ +\verb+\cite{<list of keys>}+ & Cite one or more references. \verb+<key>+ is same as that of \verb+\bibitem+. Prepend a * in front of a key to merge the reference with the previous one in the bibliography.\\ +\verb+\cite{*[{<prepended>}][{<appended>}]{<keys>}+ & Prepend and/or append text to a bibliography entry. Note use of curly braces within the square brackets.\\ +\verb+\onlinecite{<key>}+ & For superscript style citations, place the corresponding number on the baseline rather than as a superscript.\\ +\verb+\bibinfo[<tag>]{<text>}+ & A pure markup macro that adds tagging information to the components of a reference. \revtex~4 Bib\TeX\ style files automatically add them appropriately. Doesn't affect the typesetting.\\ +\verb+\url{<url>}+ & Typeset a URL (\revtex~4 automatically loads \texttt{url.sty}).Bib\TeX\ styles automatically add this markup.\\ +\verb+\eprint{<e-print id>}+ & Typeset an e-print identifier. Bib\TeX\ styles automatically add this markup.\\ +\verb+\footnote{<text>}+ & Create a footnote or endnote in bibliography depending on class options. \verb+\footnote+ within a table will create a footnote attached to the table.\\ +\verb+\footnotemark{<key>}+, \verb+\footnotetext[<key>]{<text>}+ & In a table, allows for multiple items to share the note. \\ +\verb+\label{<key>}+ & Label an item for cross-referencing. \verb+\label+ should appear within the argument of the cross-referenced item (e.g., \verb+\section{\label{<key>}...}+ or \verb+\caption{\label{<key>}...}+.\\ +\verb+\ref{<key>}+ & Refer to an item labeled by \verb+\label{<key>}+.\\ +\verb+\pageref{<key>}+ & Refer to the page on which an item labeled by \verb+\label{<key>}+ appears.\\ +% +\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textsc{Math and Equation Commands}\rule[-6pt]{0pt}{18pt}}\\* +\verb+$+ & Inline math delimiter.\\ +\verb+\begin{equation}+ & Display numbered one-line equation.\\ +\verb+\[+, \verb+\]+ & Display unnumbered one-line equation.\\ +\verb+\begin{eqnarray}+ & Display multiple equations together or a +long equation that requires multiple lines. Use \verb+widetext+ +environment for an equation that must span the page in two-column formatting.\\ +\verb+\nonumber+ & Suppress numbering of an equation with +\verb+eqnarray+.\\ +\verb+\begin{eqnarray*}+ & Display multiple equations with no equation +numbering at all.\\ +\verb+&+ & Alignment character for equations within \verb+eqnarray+.\\ +\verb+\\+ & End a row in \verb+eqnarray+.\\ +\verb+\\*+ & Prevent a page break at this point in an +\verb+eqnarray+.\\ +\verb+\label{<key>}+ & Label an equation or group of equations for +cross-referencing.\\ +\verb+\ref{<key>}+ & Refer to an equation by its label (e.g., +\verb+Eq~(ref{<key>})+).\\ +\verb+\tag{<key}}+ & Specify an alternative labeling separate from the +automatic numbering of equations. Requires \verb+[amsmath]+.\\ +\verb+\text{<text>}+ & Non-italicized text within a math +context. Requires \verb+[amsmath]+. Do not use \verb+\rm+, +\verb+\textrm+, or \verb+\mbox+.\\ +% +\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textsc{Some} AMS-\LaTeX\ \textsc{Commands}\rule[-6pt]{0pt}{18pt}}\\* +\verb+\begin{split}+ & Split equations with alignment.\\ +\verb+\begin{multline}+ & Split equations without alignment.\\ +\verb+\begin{align}+ & Equation groups with alignment.\\ +\verb+\begin{gather}+ & Equation groups without alignment.\\ +\verb+\begin{subequations}+ & Create an equation array in which each +equation is individually numbered (4a, 4b, 4c, etc.) as part of a +single group of equations that can be referenced as a whole.\\ +\verb+\intertext+ & Textual interjections within a display equation.\\ +\verb+\usepackage{amscd}+ & Create commutative diagrams.\\ +\verb+\begin{pmatrix}+ & Matrices with parentheses as delimiters.\\ +\verb+\begin{bmatrix}+ & Matrices with square brackets as delimiters.\\ +\verb+\begin{Bmatrix}+ & Matrices with curly braces as delimiters.\\ +\verb+\begin{vmatrix}+ & Matrices with vertical bars as delimiters.\\ +\verb+\begin{Vmatrix}+ & Matrices with double vertical bars as +delimiters.\\ +\verb+\hdotsfor+ & Row of dots in a matrix.\\ +\verb+\Hat+ & Alternative \verb+\hat+ accent for stacking.\\ +\verb+\Check+ & Alternative \verb+\check+ accent for stacking.\\ +\verb+\Tilde+ & Alternative \verb+\tilde+ accent for stacking.\\ +\verb+\Acute+ & Alternative \verb+\acute+ accent for stacking.\\ +\verb+\Grave+ & Alternative \verb+\grave+ accent for stacking.\\ +\verb+\Dot+ & Alternative \verb+\dot+ accent for stacking.\\ +\verb+\Ddot+ & Alternative \verb+\ddot+ accent for stacking.\\ +\verb+\Breve+ & Alternative \verb+\breve+ accent for stacking.\\ +\verb+\Vec+ & Alternative \verb+\vec+ accent for stacking.\\ +\verb+\xleftarrow+ & Extensible left arrow.\\ +\verb+\xrightarrow+ & Extensible right arrow.\\ +\verb+\overset+ & Place a symbol over another.\\ +\verb+\underset+ & Place a symbol under another.\\ +\verb+\lvert+ & Vertical bar with spacing rules appropriate for use as +a left delimiter.\\ +\verb+\rvert+ & Vertical bar with spacing rules appropriate for use as +a right delimiter.\\ +\verb+\lVert+ & Double vertical bar with spacing rules appropriate for use as +a left delimiter.\\ +\verb+\rVert+ & Double vertical bar with spacing rules appropriate for use as +a right delimiter.\\ +\verb+\DeclareMathOperator+ & Declare a new math operator so that +spacing and font is correct.\\ +\verb+\text+ & Words and phrases in display math.\\ +\verb+\boldsymbol+ & Make symbol bold. Also available in bm.sty.\\ +\verb+\sideset+ & Sets subscripts and superscripts at the corners of a +summation or product.\\ +\verb+\substack+ & Create a stack of subexpressions (for example, +stacked summation limits).\\ +\verb+\begin{subarray}+ & Like \verb+\substack+, but allows finer +control of subexpression alignment.\\ +\verb+\mathfrak+ & Replaces \verb+\frak+.\\ +\verb+\mathbb+ & Replaces \verb+\Bbb+.\\ +% +\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textsc{Font Commands}\rule[-6pt]{0pt}{18pt}}\\* +\verb+\textbf{<text>}+ & Text boldface font.\\ +\verb+\textit{<text>}+ & Text italicixed font.\\ +\verb+\textrm{<text>}+ & Text Roman font.\\ +\verb+\textsl{<text>}+ & Text Slanted font.\\ +\verb+\textsc{<text>}+ & Text Small Caps font.\\ +\verb+\textsf{<text>}+ & Text Sans Serif font.\\ +\verb+\textmd{<text>}+ & Text Medium Series font.\\ +\verb+\textnormal{<text>}+ & Text Normal Series font.\\ +\verb+\textup{<text>}+ & Text Upright Series font.\\ +\verb+\texttt{<text>}+ & Text Typewriter font.\\ +\verb+\mathit{<text>}+ & Math italics font. \\ +\verb+\mathbf{<text>}+ & Math boldface font.\\ +\verb+\mathtt{<text>}+ & Math typewriter font.\\ +\verb+\mathsf{<text>}+ & Math sans serif font.\\ +\verb+\mathcal{<text>}+ & Math calligraphic font. \\ +\verb+\mathfrak{<text>}+ & Math fraktur font. Requires +\verb+[amsfonts]+ or \verb+[amssymb]+.\\ +\verb+\mathbb{<text>}+ & Math blackboard bold font. Requires +\verb+[amsfonts]+ or \verb+[amssymb]+.\\ +\verb+\bm{<text>}+ & Bold math symbols (Greek and other symbols). Requires \verb+\usepackage{bm}+.\\ +% +\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textsc{Table Commands}\rule[-6pt]{0pt}{18pt}}\\* +\verb+\begin{table}[<placement>]+ & Start a table float environment set to the +current column width. The +placement options may be any combination of h, t, b, p, or ! signifying +here, top, bottom, page, and ``as soon as possible'', +respectively. A placement option of H will allow a long table to break +across pages. \LaTeX\ may not be able to honor placement +requests.\\ +\verb+\begin{table*}+ & Start a non-floating table environment set to the +current page width. Will be deferred to the following page.\\ +\verb+\begin{ruledtabular}+ & Adds \textit{Physical Review} style double +(Scotch) rules around a table and adjusts the intercolumn spacing.\\ +\verb+\begin{tabular}[<position>]{<column specs>}+ & The +\verb+\tabular+ envrionment sets the positions and the number of +columns (as well as alignment) in the table.\\ +\verb+\begin{tabular*}{<width>}[<pos>]{<col specs>}+ & Like +\verb+tabular+, but with a set width.\\ +\verb+\squeezetable+ & Set table in a smaller font smaller. Place this +macro before the \verb+\begin{table}+ line and sandwich everything +between \verb+\begingroup+ and \verb+\endgroup+.\\ +\verb+\begin{longtable}{<column specs>}+ & Create a table set to the current column +width that spans more than one +page or column. \verb+\usepackage{longtable}+ required.\\ +\verb+\begin{longtable*}{<column specs>}+ & Create a table set to the +current page width that spans more than one page. \verb+\usepackage{longtable}+ required.\\ +\verb+\caption{<text>}+ & Adds a caption for the table.\\ +\verb+\printtables+ & With \verb+[endfloats]+, control where the +held back tables actually appear.\\ +\verb+\begin{turnpage}+ & Rotate a table or figure by 90 degrees +(landscape mode). Will put figure or table on a page by +itself. Requires \verb+\graphics+ package.\\ +% +\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textsc{Graphics Commands}\rule[-6pt]{0pt}{18pt}}\\* +\verb+\begin{figure}[<placement>]+ & Start a figure float environment +set to the current column width. +The placement options may be any combination of h, t, b, p, or ! signifying +here, top, bottom, page, and ``as soon as possible'', +respectively. A placement option of H will allow a long table to break +across pages. \LaTeX\ may not be able to honor placement +requests.\\ +\verb+\begin{figure*}+ & Start a non-floating figure environment set +to the current page width. Will be deferred to the following page.\\ +\verb+\includegraphics[<scale,rotation>]+\verb+{fig file}+& Defined +by invoking either \verb+\usepackage{graphics}+ or +\verb+\usepackage{graphicx}+, the standard \LaTeXe\ packages for calling +in figures. \verb+graphicx+ is the same as \verb+graphics+, but uses +key-value pairs for optional arguments.\\ +\verb+\usepackage{epsfig}+ & Provides an alternative interface to the +\verb+graphics+ package similar to the epsf class option in \revtex~3.\\ +\verb+\printfigures+ & With \verb+[endfloats]+, control where the +held back figures actually appear.\\ +% +\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textsc{Miscellaneous Commands}\rule[-6pt]{0pt}{18pt}}\\* +\verb+\begin{widetext}+ & Change column width to be the page +width. Will add guiding rules.\\ +\verb+\twocolumngrid+ & Low-level switch to a two column layout.\\ +\verb+\onecolumngrid+ & Low-level switch to a single page-wide column layout.\\ +\verb+\protect+ & Protect a fragile command within a macro with a +``moving'' argument. \verb+\caption+ and \verb+\footnote+ are common +macros that have moving arguments.\\ +\verb+\frac{numerator}{denominator}+ & Create a fraction. Use in place of \verb+\over+.\\ +% +\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textsc{\revtex~4 and Miscellaneous Symbols}\rule[-6pt]{0pt}{18pt}}\\* +\verb+\textemdash+ & \textemdash\\ +\verb+\textendash+ & \textendash\\ +\verb+\textexclamdown+ & \textexclamdown\\ +\verb+\textquestiondown+ & \textquestiondown\\ +\verb+\textquotedblleft+ & \textquotedblleft\\ +\verb+\textquotedblright+ & \textquotedblright\\ +\verb+\textquoteleft+ & \textquoteleft\\ +\verb+\textquoteright+ & \textquoteright\\ +\verb+\textbullet+ & \textbullet\\ +\verb+\textperiodcentered+ & \textperiodcentered\\ +\verb+\textvisiblespace+ & \textvisiblespace\\ +\verb+\textcompworkmark+ & Break a ligature.\\ % ``fluffier'' +%vs. ``f\textcompworkmark luf\textcompworkmark fier''.\\ +\verb+\textcircled{<char>}+ & Circle a character. \textcircled{e}.\\ +\verb+\lambdabar+ & $\lambdabar$ \\ +\cmd\openone & $\openone$\\ +\cmd\altsuccsim & $\altsuccsim$ \\ +\cmd\altprecsim & $\altprecsim$ \\ +\cmd\alt & $\alt$ \\ +\cmd\agt & $\agt$ \\ +\cmd\tensor\ x & $\tensor x$ \\ +\cmd\overstar\ x & $\overstar x$ \\ +\cmd\loarrow\ x & $\loarrow x$ \\ +\cmd\roarrow\ x & $\roarrow x$ \\ +\verb+\mathring{x}+ & $\mathring{x}$ (Replaces +\verb+\overcir+). Standard \LaTeXe\ . \\ +\verb+\dddot{x}+ & $\dddot{x}$ (Replaces \verb+\overdots+). Requires \verb+[amsmath]+.\\ +\verb+\triangleq+ & $\triangleq$ (Replaces +\verb+\corresponds+). Requires \verb+[amssymb]+.\\ +\cmd\biglb\ ( \cmd\bigrb ) & $\biglb( \bigrb)$ \\ +\cmd\Biglb\ ( \cmd\Bigrb ) & $\Biglb( \Bigrb)$ \\ +\cmd\bigglb\ ( \cmd\biggrb ) & $\bigglb( \biggrb)$ \\ +\cmd\Bigglb\ ( \cmd\Biggrb\ ) & $\Bigglb( \Biggrb)$ +\end{longtable*} + +\end{document} diff --git a/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/ltxdocext.pdf b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/ltxdocext.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..c758eea --- /dev/null +++ b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/ltxdocext.pdf diff --git a/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/ltxfront.pdf b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/ltxfront.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..cbaed6e --- /dev/null +++ b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/ltxfront.pdf diff --git a/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/ltxgrid.pdf b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/ltxgrid.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..5df63cd --- /dev/null +++ b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/ltxgrid.pdf diff --git a/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/ltxutil.pdf b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/ltxutil.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..6c85b2f --- /dev/null +++ b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/ltxutil.pdf diff --git a/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/revtex4-2.pdf b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/revtex4-2.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..4b5e778 --- /dev/null +++ b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/revtex4-2.pdf diff --git a/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aapm/aapmsamp.bib b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aapm/aapmsamp.bib new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3172885 --- /dev/null +++ b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aapm/aapmsamp.bib @@ -0,0 +1,483 @@ +@PREAMBLE{ + "\providecommand{\noopsort}[1]{}" + # "\providecommand{\singleletter}[1]{#1}%" +} + +@BOOK{Bire82, + author = {N. D. Birell and P. C. W. Davies}, + year = 1982, + title = {Quantum Fields in Curved Space}, + publisher = {Cambridge University Press} +} + +@ARTICLE{feyn54, + author = "R. P. Feynman", + year = "1954", + journal = "Phys.\ Rev.", + volume = "94", + pages = "262", + doi = "10.1029/2002JD002268", +} + +@ARTICLE{epr, + author = "A. Einstein and {\relax Yu} Podolsky and N. Rosen", + year = "1935", + journal = "Phys.\ Rev.", + volume = "47", + pages = "777", +} + +@ARTICLE{Berman1983, + author = "Berman, Jr., G. P. and Izrailev, Jr., F. M.", + title = "Stability of nonlinear modes", + journal = "Physica D", + volume = "88", + pages = "445", + year = "1983", +} + +@ARTICLE{Davies1998, + author = "E. B. Davies and L. Parns", + title = "Trapped modes in acoustic waveguides", + journal = "Q. J. Mech. Appl. Math.", + volume = "51", + pages = "477--492", + year = "1988", +} + +@MISC{witten2001, + author = "Edward Witten", + eprint = "hep-th/0106109", + year = "2001", +} + +@INBOOK{Beutler1994, + author = "E. Beutler", + editor = "E. Beutler and M. A. Lichtman and B. W. Coller and T. S. Kipps", + title = "Williams Hematology", + chapter = "7", + pages = "654--662", + publisher = "McGraw-Hill", + year = "1994", + + edition = "5", + address = "New York", + volume = "2", +} + +@INBOOK{inbook-full, + author = "Donald E. Knuth", + title = "Fundamental Algorithms", + volume = 1, + series = "The Art of Computer Programming", + publisher = "Addison-Wesley", + address = "Reading, Massachusetts", + edition = "Second", + month = "10~" # jan, + year = "\noopsort{1973b}1973", + type = "Section", + chapter = "1.2", + pages = "10--119", + note = "A full INBOOK entry", +} + +@ARTICLE{Smith2005, + author = "J. S. Smith and G. W. Johnson", + journal = "Philos. Trans. R. Soc. London, Ser. B", + title = "", + year = "2005", + + volume = "777", + pages = "1395", +} + +@UNPUBLISHED{Smith2010, + author = "W. J. Smith and T. J. Johnson and B. G. Miller", + title = "Surface chemistry and preferential crystal orientation on a silicon surface", + note = "{J. Appl. Phys.} (unpublished)", + + month = "", + year = "", +} + +@UNPUBLISHED{Smith2010a, + author = "V. K. Smith and K. Johnson and M. O. Klein", + title = "Surface chemistry and preferential crystal orientation on a silicon surface", + note = "{J. Appl. Phys.} (submitted)", + + month = "", + year = "", +} + +@UNPUBLISHED{unpublished-full, + author = "Ulrich {\"{U}}nderwood and Ned {\~N}et and Paul {\={P}}ot", + title = "Lower Bounds for Wishful Research Results", + month = nov # ", " # dec, + year = 1988, + note = "Talk at Fanstord University (A full UNPUBLISHED entry)", +} + +@MISC{JohnsonMillerSmith2007, + + author = "M. P. Johnson and K. L. Miller and K. Smith", + title = "", + howpublished = "personal communication", + month = "1~" # may, + year = "2007", + note = "", +} + +@PROCEEDINGS{Smith2007, + title = "AIP Conf. Proc.", + year = "2007", + + editor = "J. Smith", + volume = "841", + number = "21", + series = "", + address = "", + month = "", + organization = "", + publisher = "", + note = "", +} + +@PROCEEDINGS{proceedings-full, + editor = "Wizard V. Oz and Mihalis Yannakakis", + title = "Proc. Fifteenth Annual", + number = 17, + series = "All ACM Conferences", + month = mar, + year = 1983, + address = "Boston", + organization = "ACM", + publisher = "Academic Press", + note = "A full PROCEEDINGS entry", +} + +@UNPUBLISHED{Burstyn2004, + author = "Y. Burstyn", + title = "{Proceedings of the 5th International Molecular Beam Epitaxy Conference, Santa Fe, NM}", + note = "(unpublished)", + + month = "5--8~" # oct, + year = "2004", +} + +@PROCEEDINGS{Quinn2001, + title = "{Proceedings of the 2003 Particle Accelerator Conference, Portland, OR, 12-16 May 2005}", + year = "2001", + + editor = "B. Quinn", + address = "New York", + publisher = "Wiley", + note = "Albeit the conference was held in 2005, it was the 2003 conference, and the proceedings were published in 2001; go figure", +} + +@ARTICLE{Agarwal2001, + author = "A. G. Agarwal", + title = "{Proceedings of the Fifth Low Temperature Conference, Madison, WI, 1999}", + journal = "Semiconductors", + year = "2001", + + volume = "66", + pages = "1238", +} + +@ARTICLE{SmithDA01, + author = "R. Smith", + title = "Hummingbirds are our friends", + journal = {J. Appl. Phys. (these proceedings)}, + year = "", + volume = "", + number = "", + pages = "", + month = "", + note = "Abstract No. DA-01", +} + +@ARTICLE{Smith2007a, + author = "J. Smith", + title = "", + journal = "Proc. SPIE", + year = "2007", + + volume = "124", + pages = "367", + note = "Required title is missing", +} + +@TECHREPORT{techreport-full, + author = "Tom T{\'{e}}rrific", + title = "An {$O(n \log n / \! \log\log n)$} Sorting Algorithm", + institution = "Fanstord University", + type = "Wishful Research Result", + number = "7", + address = "Computer Science Department, Fanstord, California", + month = oct, + year = 1988, + note = "A full TECHREPORT entry", +} + +@TECHREPORT{Nelson1999, + author = "J. Nelson", + type = "{TWI Report}", + number = "666/1999", + institution = "", + year = jan # "~1999", + + note = "Required institution missing", +} + +@TECHREPORT{Fields2005, + author = "W. K. Fields", + type = "{ECE Report No.}", + number = "AL944", + institution = "", + year = "2005", + + note = "Required institution missing", +} + +@MISC{Zalkins2008, + + author = "Y. M. Zalkins", + title = "", + howpublished = "e-print arXiv:cond-mat/040426", + month = "", + year = "2008", + note = "", +} + +@MISC{Nelson2005, + + author = "J. Nelson", + howpublished = "{U.S. Patent No.} 5,693,000", + year = "12~" # dec # "~2005", +} + +@MASTERSTHESIS{Nelson1999a, + author = "J. K. Nelson", + title = "", + school = "New York University", + year = "1999", + + type = "M.{S}. thesis", + address = "", + month = "", + note = "", +} + +@MASTERSTHESIS{mastersthesis-full, + author = "{\'{E}}douard Masterly", + title = "Mastering Thesis Writing", + school = "Stanford University", + type = "Master's project", + address = "English Department", + month = jun # "-" # aug, + year = 1988, + note = "A full MASTERSTHESIS entry", +} + +@PHDTHESIS{Smith2003, + author = "S. M. Smith", + title = "", + school = "Massachusetts Institute of Technology", + year = "2003", + + type = "{Ph.D.} thesis", + address = "", + month = "", + note = "", +} + +@ARTICLE{KawaLin2003, + author = "S. R. Kawa and S.-J. Lin", + title = "", + journal = "J. Geophys. Res.", + year = "2003", + + volume = "108", + number = "D6", + pages = "4201", + month = "", + note = "{DOI:10.1029/2002JD002268}", +} + +@PHDTHESIS{phdthesis-full, + author = "F. Phidias Phony-Baloney", + title = "Fighting Fire with Fire: Festooning {F}rench Phrases", + school = "Fanstord University", + type = "{PhD} Dissertation", + address = "Department of French", + month = jun # "-" # aug, + year = 1988, + note = "A full PHDTHESIS entry", +} + +@BOOK{book-full, + author = "Donald E. Knuth", + title = "Seminumerical Algorithms", + volume = 2, + series = "The Art of Computer Programming", + publisher = "Addison-Wesley", + address = "Reading, Massachusetts", + edition = "Second", + month = "10~" # jan, + year = "\noopsort{1973c}1981", + note = "A full BOOK entry", +} + +@BOOKLET{booklet-full, + author = "Jill C. Knvth", + title = "The Programming of Computer Art", + howpublished = "Vernier Art Center", + address = "Stanford, California", + month = feb, + year = 1988, + note = "A full BOOKLET entry", +} + +@INBOOK{ballagh2000, + author = "R. Ballagh and C.M. Savage", + editor = "C.M. Savage and M. Das", + title = "Bose-Einstein condensation: from atomic physics to quantum fluids, Proceedings of the 13th Physics Summer School", + year = "2000", + publisher = "World Scientific", + address = "Singapore", + eprint = "cond-mat/0008070", +} + +@inBook{Magnetism, + author = "W. Opechowski and R. Guccione", + title = "Introduction to the Theory of Normal Metals", + volume = "IIa", + pages = "105", + editor = "G. T. Rado and H. Suhl", + booktitle = "Magnetism", + publisher = "Academic Press", + address = "New York", +} + year = "1965", + +@INPROCEEDINGS{Magnetismb, + author = "W. Opechowski and R. Guccione", + title = "Introduction to the Theory of Normal Metals", + editor = "G. T. Rado and H. Suhl", + booktitle = "Magnetism", + volume = "IIa", + pages = "105", + publisher = "Academic Press", + address = "New York", + year = "1965", +} + +@INBOOK{Smith80, + author = "J. M. Smith", + title = "Molecular Dynamics", + publisher = "Academic", + year = "1980", + address = "New York", + editor = "C. Brown", +} + +@article{ZS71, + author = "V. E. Zakharov and A. B. Shabat", + year = "1971", + title = "Exact theory of two-dimensional self-focusing and one-dimensional self-modulation of waves in nonlinear media", + journal = "Zh. Eksp. Teor. Fiz.", + volume = "61", + pages = "118--134", + translation = "Sov. Phys. JETP \textbf{34}, 62 (1972)" +} + +@INCOLLECTION{Beutler1994a, + author = "E. Beutler", + year = "1994", + booktitle = "Williams Hematology", + edition = "5", + chapter = "7", + editor = "E. Beutler and M. A. Lichtman and B. W. Coller and T. S. Kipps", + publisher = "McGraw-Hill", + address = "New York", + volume = "2", + pages = "654--662", +} + +@INCOLLECTION{ballagh2000a, + author = "R. Ballagh and C.M. Savage", + year = "2000", + title = "Bose-Einstein condensation: from atomic physics to quantum fluids", + booktitle = "Proceedings of the 13th Physics Summer School", + editor = "C.M. Savage and M. Das", + publisher = "World Scientific", + address = "Singapore", + eprint = "cond-mat/0008070", +} + +@INCOLLECTION{Magnetisma, + author = "W. Opechowski and R. Guccione", + year = "1965", + title = "Introduction to the Theory of Normal Metals", + booktitle = "Magnetism", + editor = "G. T. Rado and H. Suhl", + publisher = "Academic Press", + address = "New York", + volume = "IIa", + pages = "105", +} + +@INCOLLECTION{Smith80a, + author = "J. M. Smith", + year = "1980", + booktitle = "Molecular Dynamics", + editor = "C. Brown", + publisher = "Academic", + address = "New York", +} + +@INCOLLECTION{incollection-full, + key = "incol-ful", + author = "Daniel D. Lincoll", + year = 1977, + title = "Semigroups of Recurrences", + booktitle = "High Speed Computer and Algorithm Organization", + edition = "Third", + series = "Fast Computers", + number = 23, + chapter = 3, + type = "Part", + editor = "David J. Lipcoll and D. H. Lawrie and A. H. Sameh", + publisher = "Academic Press", + address = "New York", + month = sep, + pages = "179--183", + note = "A full INCOLLECTION entry", +} + +@INPROCEEDINGS{inproceedings-full, + author = "Alfred V. Oaho and Jeffrey D. Ullman and Mihalis Yannakakis", + title = "On Notions of Information Transfer in {VLSI} Circuits", + editor = "Wizard V. Oz and Mihalis Yannakakis", + booktitle = "Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM", + number = 17, + series = "All ACM Conferences", + pages = "133--139", + month = mar, + year = 1983, + address = "Boston", + organization = "ACM", + publisher = "Academic Press", + note = "A full INPROCEDINGS entry", +} + +@MANUAL{manual-full, + author = "Larry Manmaker", + title = "The Definitive Computer Manual", + organization = "Chips-R-Us", + address = "Silicon Valley", + edition = "Silver", + month = apr # "-" # may, + year = 1986, + note = "A full MANUAL entry", +} diff --git a/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aapm/aapmsamp.pdf b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aapm/aapmsamp.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..b7c8908 --- /dev/null +++ b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aapm/aapmsamp.pdf diff --git a/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aapm/aapmsamp.tex b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aapm/aapmsamp.tex new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e1c5ff9 --- /dev/null +++ b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aapm/aapmsamp.tex @@ -0,0 +1,616 @@ +% ****** Start of file aapmsamp.tex ****** +% +% This file is part of the AAPM files in the AAPM distribution for REVTeX 4-2. +% Version 4.2a of REVTeX, January 2015 +% +% Copyright (c) 2015 American Association of Physicists in Medicine (AAPM). +% +% See the AAPM README file for restrictions and more information. +% +% TeX'ing this file requires that you have AMS-LaTeX 2.0 installed +% as well as the rest of the prerequisites for REVTeX 4.2 +% +% It also requires running BibTeX. The commands are as follows: +% +% 1) latex aapmsamp +% 2) bibtex aapmsamp +% 3) latex aapmsamp +% 4) latex aapmsamp +% +% Use this file as a source of example code for your aapm document. +% Use the file aapmtemplate.tex as a template for your document. +\documentclass[% + aapm, + mph,% + amsmath,amssymb, +%preprint,% + reprint,% +%author-year,% +%author-numerical,% +]{revtex4-2} + +\usepackage{graphicx}% Include figure files +\usepackage{dcolumn}% Align table columns on decimal point +\usepackage{bm}% bold math + +\usepackage[mathlines]{lineno}% Enable numbering of text and display math +\modulolinenumbers[5]% Line numbers with a gap of 5 lines +\linenumbers\relax % Commence numbering lines + +\begin{document} + +\preprint{AAPM/123-QED} + +\title[Sample title]{Sample Title:\\with Forced Linebreak\footnote{Error!}}% Force line breaks with \\ +\thanks{Footnote to title of article.} + +\author{A. Author} + \altaffiliation[Also at ]{Physics Department, XYZ University.}%Lines break automatically or can be forced with \\ +\author{B. Author}% + \email{Second.Author@institution.edu.} +\affiliation{ +Authors' institution and/or address%\\This line break forced with \textbackslash\textbackslash +}% + +\author{C. Author} + \homepage{http://www.Second.institution.edu/~Charlie.Author.} +\affiliation{% +Second institution and/or address%\\This line break forced% with \\ +}% + +\date{\today}% It is always \today, today, + % but any date may be explicitly specified + +\begin{abstract} +An article usually includes an abstract, a concise summary of the work +covered at length in the main body of the article. It is used for +secondary publications and for information retrieval purposes. +% +\end{abstract} + +\keywords{Suggested keywords}%Use showkeys class option if keyword + %display desired +\maketitle + +\begin{quotation} +The ``lead paragraph'' is encapsulated with the \LaTeX\ +\verb+quotation+ environment and is formatted as a single paragraph before the first section heading. +(The \verb+quotation+ environment reverts to its usual meaning after the first sectioning command.) +Note that numbered references are allowed in the lead paragraph. +% +The lead paragraph will only be found in an article being prepared for the journal \textit{Chaos}. +\end{quotation} + +\section{\label{sec:level1}First-level heading:\protect\\ The line +break was forced \lowercase{via} \textbackslash\textbackslash} + +This sample document demonstrates proper use of REV\TeX~4.2 (and +\LaTeXe) in manuscripts prepared for submission to AAPM +journals. Further information can be found in the documentation included in the distribution or available at +\url{http://www.aapm.org} and in the documentation for +REV\TeX~4.2 itself. + +When commands are referred to in this example file, they are always +shown with their required arguments, using normal \TeX{} format. In +this format, \verb+#1+, \verb+#2+, etc. stand for required +author-supplied arguments to commands. For example, in +\verb+\section{#1}+ the \verb+#1+ stands for the title text of the +author's section heading, and in \verb+\title{#1}+ the \verb+#1+ +stands for the title text of the paper. + +Line breaks in section headings at all levels can be introduced using +\textbackslash\textbackslash. A blank input line tells \TeX\ that the +paragraph has ended. + +\subsection{\label{sec:level2}Second-level heading: Formatting} + +This file may be formatted in both the \texttt{preprint} (the default) and +\texttt{reprint} styles; the latter format may be used to +mimic final journal output. In addition, there is another +option available, \texttt{lengthcheck}, which formats the document as closely +as possible to an actual journal article, to facilitate the author's +performance of a length check. Either format may be used for submission +purposes; however, for peer review and production, AAPM will format the +article using the \texttt{preprint} class option. Hence, it is +essential that authors check that their manuscripts format acceptably +under \texttt{preprint}. Manuscripts submitted to AAPM that do not +format correctly under the \texttt{preprint} option may be delayed in +both the editorial and production processes. + +The \texttt{widetext} environment will make the text the width of the +full page, as on page~\pageref{eq:wideeq}. (Note the use the +\verb+\pageref{#1}+ to get the page number right automatically.) The +width-changing commands only take effect in \texttt{twocolumn} +formatting. It has no effect if \texttt{preprint} formatting is chosen +instead. + +\subsubsection{\label{sec:level3}Third-level heading: Citations and Footnotes} + +Citations in text refer to entries in the Bibliography; +they use the commands \verb+\cite{#1}+ or \verb+\onlinecite{#1}+. +Because REV\TeX\ uses the \verb+natbib+ package of Patrick Daly, +its entire repertoire of commands are available in your document; +see the \verb+natbib+ documentation for further details. +The argument of \verb+\cite+ is a comma-separated list of \emph{keys}; +a key may consist of letters and numerals. + +By default, AAPM citations are numerical; \cite{feyn54} +to give a textual citation, use \verb+\onlinecite{#1}+: (Refs.~\onlinecite{witten2001,epr,Bire82}). +REV\TeX\ ``collapses'' lists of consecutive numerical citations when appropriate. +To illustrate, we cite several together \cite{feyn54,witten2001,epr,Berman1983}, +and once again (Refs.~\onlinecite{epr,feyn54,Bire82,Berman1983}). +Note that, when numerical citations are used, the references were sorted into the same order they appear in the bibliography. + +A reference within the bibliography is specified with a \verb+\bibitem{#1}+ command, +where the argument is the citation key mentioned above. +\verb+\bibitem{#1}+ commands may be crafted by hand or, preferably, +generated by using Bib\TeX. +The AAPM styles for REV\TeX~4 include Bib\TeX\ style file +\verb+aapmrev4-2.bst+, appropriate for +numbered bibliography. +REV\TeX~4 will automatically choose the style appropriate for +the document's selected class options: the default is numerical. + +This sample file demonstrates a simple use of Bib\TeX\ +via a \verb+\bibliography+ command referencing the \verb+aapmsamp.bib+ file. +Running Bib\TeX\ (in this case \texttt{bibtex +aapmsamp}) after the first pass of \LaTeX\ produces the file +\verb+aapmsamp.bbl+ which contains the automatically formatted +\verb+\bibitem+ commands (including extra markup information via +\verb+\bibinfo+ commands). If not using Bib\TeX, the +\verb+thebibiliography+ environment should be used instead. + +\paragraph{Fourth-level heading is run in.}% +Footnotes are produced using the \verb+\footnote{#1}+ command. +Numerical style citations put footnotes into the +bibliography\footnote{Automatically placing footnotes into the bibliography requires using BibTeX to compile the bibliography.}. +Note: due to the method used to place footnotes in the bibliography, \emph{you +must re-run BibTeX every time you change any of your document's +footnotes}. + +\section{Math and Equations} +Inline math may be typeset using the \verb+$+ delimiters. Bold math +symbols may be achieved using the \verb+bm+ package and the +\verb+\bm{#1}+ command it supplies. For instance, a bold $\alpha$ can +be typeset as \verb+$\bm{\alpha}$+ giving $\bm{\alpha}$. Fraktur and +Blackboard (or open face or double struck) characters should be +typeset using the \verb+\mathfrak{#1}+ and \verb+\mathbb{#1}+ commands +respectively. Both are supplied by the \texttt{amssymb} package. For +example, \verb+$\mathbb{R}$+ gives $\mathbb{R}$ and +\verb+$\mathfrak{G}$+ gives $\mathfrak{G}$ + +In \LaTeX\ there are many different ways to display equations, and a +few preferred ways are noted below. Displayed math will flush left by +default. + +Below we have numbered single-line equations, the most common kind: +\begin{eqnarray} +\chi_+(p)\alt{\bf [}2|{\bf p}|(|{\bf p}|+p_z){\bf ]}^{-1/2} +\left( +\begin{array}{c} +|{\bf p}|+p_z\\ +px+ip_y +\end{array}\right)\;, +\\ +\left\{% + \openone234567890abc123\alpha\beta\gamma\delta1234556\alpha\beta + \frac{1\sum^{a}_{b}}{A^2}% +\right\}% +\label{eq:one}. +\end{eqnarray} +Note the open one in Eq.~(\ref{eq:one}). + +Not all numbered equations will fit within a narrow column this +way. The equation number will move down automatically if it cannot fit +on the same line with a one-line equation: +\begin{equation} +\left\{ + ab12345678abc123456abcdef\alpha\beta\gamma\delta1234556\alpha\beta + \frac{1\sum^{a}_{b}}{A^2}% +\right\}. +\end{equation} + +When the \verb+\label{#1}+ command is used [cf. input for +Eq.~(\ref{eq:one})], the equation can be referred to in text without +knowing the equation number that \TeX\ will assign to it. Just +use \verb+\ref{#1}+, where \verb+#1+ is the same name that used in +the \verb+\label{#1}+ command. + +Unnumbered single-line equations can be typeset +using the \verb+\[+, \verb+\]+ format: +\[g^+g^+ \rightarrow g^+g^+g^+g^+ \dots ~,~~q^+q^+\rightarrow +q^+g^+g^+ \dots ~. \] + +\subsection{Multiline equations} + +Multiline equations are obtained by using the \verb+eqnarray+ +environment. Use the \verb+\nonumber+ command at the end of each line +to avoid assigning a number: +\begin{eqnarray} +{\cal M}=&&ig_Z^2(4E_1E_2)^{1/2}(l_i^2)^{-1} +\delta_{\sigma_1,-\sigma_2} +(g_{\sigma_2}^e)^2\chi_{-\sigma_2}(p_2)\nonumber\\ +&&\times +[\epsilon_jl_i\epsilon_i]_{\sigma_1}\chi_{\sigma_1}(p_1), +\end{eqnarray} +\begin{eqnarray} +\sum \vert M^{\text{viol}}_g \vert ^2&=&g^{2n-4}_S(Q^2)~N^{n-2} + (N^2-1)\nonumber \\ + & &\times \left( \sum_{i<j}\right) + \sum_{\text{perm}} + \frac{1}{S_{12}} + \frac{1}{S_{12}} + \sum_\tau c^f_\tau~. +\end{eqnarray} +\textbf{Note:} Do not use \verb+\label{#1}+ on a line of a multiline +equation if \verb+\nonumber+ is also used on that line. Incorrect +cross-referencing will result. Notice the use \verb+\text{#1}+ for +using a Roman font within a math environment. + +To set a multiline equation without \emph{any} equation +numbers, use the \verb+\begin{eqnarray*}+, +\verb+\end{eqnarray*}+ format: +\begin{eqnarray*} +\sum \vert M^{\text{viol}}_g \vert ^2&=&g^{2n-4}_S(Q^2)~N^{n-2} + (N^2-1)\\ + & &\times \left( \sum_{i<j}\right) + \left( + \sum_{\text{perm}}\frac{1}{S_{12}S_{23}S_{n1}} + \right) + \frac{1}{S_{12}}~. +\end{eqnarray*} +To obtain numbers not normally produced by the automatic numbering, +use the \verb+\tag{#1}+ command, where \verb+#1+ is the desired +equation number. For example, to get an equation number of +(\ref{eq:mynum}), +\begin{equation} +g^+g^+ \rightarrow g^+g^+g^+g^+ \dots ~,~~q^+q^+\rightarrow +q^+g^+g^+ \dots ~. \tag{2.6$'$}\label{eq:mynum} +\end{equation} + +A few notes on \verb=\tag{#1}=. \verb+\tag{#1}+ requires +\texttt{amsmath}. The \verb+\tag{#1}+ must come before the +\verb+\label{#1}+, if any. The numbering set with \verb+\tag{#1}+ is +\textit{transparent} to the automatic numbering in REV\TeX{}; +therefore, the number must be known ahead of time, and it must be +manually adjusted if other equations are added. \verb+\tag{#1}+ works +with both single-line and multiline equations. \verb+\tag{#1}+ should +only be used in exceptional case - do not use it to number all +equations in a paper. + +Note the equation number gets reset again: +\begin{equation} +g^+g^+g^+ \rightarrow g^+g^+g^+g^+g^+ \dots ~,~~q^+q^+\rightarrow +q^+g^+g^+ \dots ~. +\end{equation} + +Enclosing single-line and multiline equations in +\verb+\begin{subequations}+ and \verb+\end{subequations}+ will produce +a set of equations that are ``numbered'' with letters, as shown in +Eqs.~(\ref{subeq:1}) and (\ref{subeq:2}) below: +\begin{subequations} +\label{eq:whole} +\begin{equation} +\left\{ + abc123456abcdef\alpha\beta\gamma\delta1234556\alpha\beta + \frac{1\sum^{a}_{b}}{A^2} +\right\},\label{subeq:1} +\end{equation} +\begin{eqnarray} +{\cal M}=&&ig_Z^2(4E_1E_2)^{1/2}(l_i^2)^{-1} +(g_{\sigma_2}^e)^2\chi_{-\sigma_2}(p_2)\nonumber\\ +&&\times +[\epsilon_i]_{\sigma_1}\chi_{\sigma_1}(p_1).\label{subeq:2} +\end{eqnarray} +\end{subequations} +Putting a \verb+\label{#1}+ command right after the +\verb+\begin{subequations}+, allows one to +reference all the equations in a subequations environment. For +example, the equations in the preceding subequations environment were +Eqs.~(\ref{eq:whole}). + +\subsubsection{Wide equations} +The equation that follows is set in a wide format, i.e., it spans +across the full page. The wide format is reserved for long equations +that cannot be easily broken into four lines or less: +\begin{widetext} +\begin{equation} +{\cal R}^{(\text{d})}= + g_{\sigma_2}^e + \left( + \frac{[\Gamma^Z(3,21)]_{\sigma_1}}{Q_{12}^2-M_W^2} + +\frac{[\Gamma^Z(13,2)]_{\sigma_1}}{Q_{13}^2-M_W^2} + \right) + + x_WQ_e + \left( + \frac{[\Gamma^\gamma(3,21)]_{\sigma_1}}{Q_{12}^2-M_W^2} + +\frac{[\Gamma^\gamma(13,2)]_{\sigma_1}}{Q_{13}^2-M_W^2} + \right)\;. \label{eq:wideeq} +\end{equation} +\end{widetext} +This is typed to show the output is in wide format. +(Since there is no input line between \verb+\equation+ and +this paragraph, there is no paragraph indent for this paragraph.) +\section{Cross-referencing} +REV\TeX{} will automatically number sections, equations, figure +captions, and tables. In order to reference them in text, use the +\verb+\label{#1}+ and \verb+\ref{#1}+ commands. To reference a +particular page, use the \verb+\pageref{#1}+ command. + +The \verb+\label{#1}+ should appear in a section heading, within an +equation, or in a table or figure caption. The \verb+\ref{#1}+ command +is used in the text where the citation is to be displayed. Some +examples: Section~\ref{sec:level1} on page~\pageref{sec:level1}, +Table~\ref{tab:table1},% +\begin{table} +\caption{\label{tab:table1}This is a narrow table which fits into a +text column when using \texttt{twocolumn} formatting. Note that +REV\TeX~4 adjusts the intercolumn spacing so that the table fills the +entire width of the column. Table captions are numbered +automatically. This table illustrates left-aligned, centered, and +right-aligned columns. } +\begin{ruledtabular} +\begin{tabular}{lcr} +Left\footnote{Note a.}&Centered\footnote{Note b.}&Right\\ +\hline +1 & 2 & 3\\ +10 & 20 & 30\\ +100 & 200 & 300\\ +\end{tabular} +\end{ruledtabular} +\end{table} +and Fig.~\ref{fig:epsart}. + +\section{Figures and Tables} +Figures and tables are typically ``floats''; \LaTeX\ determines their +final position via placement rules. +\LaTeX\ isn't always successful in automatically placing floats where you wish them. + +Figures are marked up with the \texttt{figure} environment, the content of which +imports the image (\verb+\includegraphics+) followed by the figure caption (\verb+\caption+). +The argument of the latter command should itself contain a \verb+\label+ command if you +wish to refer to your figure with \verb+\ref+. + +Import your image using either the \texttt{graphics} or +\texttt{graphix} packages. These packages both define the +\verb+\includegraphics{#1}+ command, but they differ in the optional +arguments for specifying the orientation, scaling, and translation of the figure. +Fig.~\ref{fig:epsart}% +\begin{figure} +\includegraphics{fig_1}% Here is how to import EPS art +\caption{\label{fig:epsart} A figure caption. The figure captions are +automatically numbered.} +\end{figure} +is small enough to fit in a single column, while +Fig.~\ref{fig:wide}% +\begin{figure*} +\includegraphics{fig_2}% Here is how to import EPS art +\caption{\label{fig:wide}Use the \texttt{figure*} environment to get a wide +figure, spanning the page in \texttt{twocolumn} formatting.} +\end{figure*} +is too wide for a single column, +so instead the \texttt{figure*} environment has been used. + +The analog of the \texttt{figure} environment is \texttt{table}, which uses +the same \verb+\caption+ command. +However, you should type your caption command first within the \texttt{table}, +instead of last as you did for \texttt{figure}. + +The heart of any table is the \texttt{tabular} environment, +which represents the table content as a (vertical) sequence of table rows, +each containing a (horizontal) sequence of table cells. +Cells are separated by the \verb+&+ character; +the row terminates with \verb+\\+. +The required argument for the \texttt{tabular} environment +specifies how data are displayed in each of the columns. +For instance, a column +may be centered (\verb+c+), left-justified (\verb+l+), right-justified (\verb+r+), +or aligned on a decimal point (\verb+d+). +(Table~\ref{tab:table4}% +\begin{table} +\caption{\label{tab:table4}Numbers in columns Three--Five have been +aligned by using the ``d'' column specifier (requires the +\texttt{dcolumn} package). +Non-numeric entries (those entries without +a ``.'') in a ``d'' column are aligned on the decimal point. +Use the +``D'' specifier for more complex layouts. } +\begin{ruledtabular} +\begin{tabular}{ccddd} +One&Two&\mbox{Three}&\mbox{Four}&\mbox{Five}\\ +\hline +one&two&\mbox{three}&\mbox{four}&\mbox{five}\\ +He&2& 2.77234 & 45672. & 0.69 \\ +C\footnote{Some tables require footnotes.} + &C\footnote{Some tables need more than one footnote.} + & 12537.64 & 37.66345 & 86.37 \\ +\end{tabular} +\end{ruledtabular} +\end{table} +illustrates the use of decimal column alignment.) + +Extra column-spacing may be be specified as well, although +REV\TeX~4 sets this spacing so that the columns fill the width of the +table. +Horizontal rules are typeset using the \verb+\hline+ +command. +The doubled (or Scotch) rules that appear at the top and +bottom of a table can be achieved by enclosing the \texttt{tabular} +environment within a \texttt{ruledtabular} environment. +Rows whose columns span multiple columns can be typeset using \LaTeX's +\verb+\multicolumn{#1}{#2}{#3}+ command +(for example, see the first row of Table~\ref{tab:table3}).% +\begin{table*} +\caption{\label{tab:table3}This is a wide table that spans the page +width in \texttt{twocolumn} mode. It is formatted using the +\texttt{table*} environment. It also demonstrates the use of +\textbackslash\texttt{multicolumn} in rows with entries that span +more than one column.} +\begin{ruledtabular} +\begin{tabular}{ccccc} + &\multicolumn{2}{c}{$D_{4h}^1$}&\multicolumn{2}{c}{$D_{4h}^5$}\\ + Ion&1st alternative&2nd alternative&lst alternative +&2nd alternative\\ \hline + K&$(2e)+(2f)$&$(4i)$ &$(2c)+(2d)$&$(4f)$ \\ + Mn&$(2g)$\footnote{The $z$ parameter of these positions is $z\sim\frac{1}{4}$.} + &$(a)+(b)+(c)+(d)$&$(4e)$&$(2a)+(2b)$\\ + Cl&$(a)+(b)+(c)+(d)$&$(2g)$\footnote{This is a footnote in a table that spans the full page +width in \texttt{twocolumn} mode. It is supposed to set on the full width of the page, just as the caption does. } + &$(4e)^{\text{a}}$\\ + He&$(8r)^{\text{a}}$&$(4j)^{\text{a}}$&$(4g)^{\text{a}}$\\ + Ag& &$(4k)^{\text{a}}$& &$(4h)^{\text{a}}$\\ +\end{tabular} +\end{ruledtabular} +\end{table*} + +The tables in this document illustrate various effects. +Tables that fit in a narrow column are contained in a \texttt{table} +environment. +Table~\ref{tab:table3} is a wide table, therefore set with the +\texttt{table*} environment. +Lengthy tables may need to break across pages. +A simple way to allow this is to specify +the \verb+[H]+ float placement on the \texttt{table} or +\texttt{table*} environment. +Alternatively, using the standard \LaTeXe\ package \texttt{longtable} +gives more control over how tables break and allows headers and footers +to be specified for each page of the table. +An example of the use of \texttt{longtable} can be found +in the file \texttt{summary.tex} that is included with the REV\TeX~4 +distribution. + +There are two methods for setting footnotes within a table (these +footnotes will be displayed directly below the table rather than at +the bottom of the page or in the bibliography). +The easiest +and preferred method is just to use the \verb+\footnote{#1}+ +command. This will automatically enumerate the footnotes with +lowercase roman letters. +However, it is sometimes necessary to have +multiple entries in the table share the same footnote. +In this case, +create the footnotes using +\verb+\footnotemark[#1]+ and \verb+\footnotetext[#1]{#2}+. +\texttt{\#1} is a numeric value. +Each time the same value for \texttt{\#1} is used, +the same mark is produced in the table. +The \verb+\footnotetext[#1]{#2}+ commands are placed after the \texttt{tabular} +environment. +Examine the \LaTeX\ source and output for Tables~\ref{tab:table1} and +\ref{tab:table2}% +\begin{table} +\caption{\label{tab:table2}A table with more columns still fits +properly in a column. Note that several entries share the same +footnote. Inspect the \LaTeX\ input for this table to see +exactly how it is done.} +\begin{ruledtabular} +\begin{tabular}{cccccccc} + &$r_c$ (\AA)&$r_0$ (\AA)&$\kappa r_0$& + &$r_c$ (\AA) &$r_0$ (\AA)&$\kappa r_0$\\ +\hline +Cu& 0.800 & 14.10 & 2.550 &Sn\footnotemark[1] +& 0.680 & 1.870 & 3.700 \\ +Ag& 0.990 & 15.90 & 2.710 &Pb\footnotemark[2] +& 0.450 & 1.930 & 3.760 \\ +Au& 1.150 & 15.90 & 2.710 &Ca\footnotemark[3] +& 0.750 & 2.170 & 3.560 \\ +Mg& 0.490 & 17.60 & 3.200 &Sr\footnotemark[4] +& 0.900 & 2.370 & 3.720 \\ +Zn& 0.300 & 15.20 & 2.970 &Li\footnotemark[2] +& 0.380 & 1.730 & 2.830 \\ +Cd& 0.530 & 17.10 & 3.160 &Na\footnotemark[5] +& 0.760 & 2.110 & 3.120 \\ +Hg& 0.550 & 17.80 & 3.220 &K\footnotemark[5] +& 1.120 & 2.620 & 3.480 \\ +Al& 0.230 & 15.80 & 3.240 &Rb\footnotemark[3] +& 1.330 & 2.800 & 3.590 \\ +Ga& 0.310 & 16.70 & 3.330 &Cs\footnotemark[4] +& 1.420 & 3.030 & 3.740 \\ +In& 0.460 & 18.40 & 3.500 &Ba\footnotemark[5] +& 0.960 & 2.460 & 3.780 \\ +Tl& 0.480 & 18.90 & 3.550 & & & & \\ +\end{tabular} +\end{ruledtabular} +\footnotetext[1]{Here's the first, from Ref.~\onlinecite{feyn54}.} +\footnotetext[2]{Here's the second.} +\footnotetext[3]{Here's the third.} +\footnotetext[4]{Here's the fourth.} +\footnotetext[5]{And etc.} +\end{table} +for an illustration. + +All AAPM journals require that the initial citation of +figures or tables be in numerical order. +\LaTeX's automatic numbering of floats is your friend here: +just put each \texttt{figure} environment immediately following +its first reference (\verb+\ref+), as we have done in this example file. + +\begin{acknowledgments} +We wish to acknowledge the support of the author community in using +REV\TeX{}, offering suggestions and encouragement, testing new versions, +\dots. +\end{acknowledgments} + +\appendix + +\section{Appendixes} + +To start the appendixes, use the \verb+\appendix+ command. +This signals that all following section commands refer to appendixes +instead of regular sections. Therefore, the \verb+\appendix+ command +should be used only once---to set up the section commands to act as +appendixes. Thereafter normal section commands are used. The heading +for a section can be left empty. For example, +\begin{verbatim} +\appendix +\section{} +\end{verbatim} +will produce an appendix heading that says ``APPENDIX A'' and +\begin{verbatim} +\appendix +\section{Background} +\end{verbatim} +will produce an appendix heading that says ``APPENDIX A: BACKGROUND'' +(note that the colon is set automatically). + +If there is only one appendix, then the letter ``A'' should not +appear. This is suppressed by using the star version of the appendix +command (\verb+\appendix*+ in the place of \verb+\appendix+). + +\section{A little more on appendixes} + +Observe that this appendix was started by using +\begin{verbatim} +\section{A little more on appendixes} +\end{verbatim} + +Note the equation number in an appendix: +\begin{equation} +E=mc^2. +\end{equation} + +\subsection{\label{app:subsec}A subsection in an appendix} + +You can use a subsection or subsubsection in an appendix. Note the +numbering: we are now in Appendix~\ref{app:subsec}. + +\subsubsection{\label{app:subsubsec}A subsubsection in an appendix} +Note the equation numbers in this appendix, produced with the +subequations environment: +\begin{subequations} +\begin{eqnarray} +E&=&mc, \label{appa} +\\ +E&=&mc^2, \label{appb} +\\ +E&\agt& mc^3. \label{appc} +\end{eqnarray} +\end{subequations} +They turn out to be Eqs.~(\ref{appa}), (\ref{appb}), and (\ref{appc}). + +\nocite{*} +\bibliography{aapmsamp}% Produces the bibliography via BibTeX. + +\end{document} +% +% ****** End of file aapmsamp.tex ****** diff --git a/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aapm/aapmtemplate.tex b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aapm/aapmtemplate.tex new file mode 100644 index 0000000..113bd82 --- /dev/null +++ b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aapm/aapmtemplate.tex @@ -0,0 +1,109 @@ +%% ****** Start of file aapmtemplate.tex ****** % +%% +%% This file is part of the files in the distribution of AAPM substyles for REVTeX4.2. +%% Version 4.2a of January 28, 2015. +%% +% +% This is a template for producing documents for use with +% the REVTEX 4.2 document class and the AAPM substyles. +% +% Copy this file to another name and then work on that file. +% That way, you always have this original template file to use. + +\documentclass[aapm,graphicx]{revtex4-2} +%\documentclass[aapm,reprint]{revtex4-2} + +\draft % marks overfull lines with a black rule on the right + +\usepackage[mathlines]{lineno}% Enable numbering of text and display math +\modulolinenumbers[5]% Line numbers with a gap of 5 lines +\linenumbers\relax % Commence numbering lines + +\begin{document} + +% Use the \preprint command to place your local institutional report number +% on the title page in preprint mode. +% Multiple \preprint commands are allowed. +%\preprint{} + +\title{} %Title of paper + +% repeat the \author .. \affiliation etc. as needed +% \email, \thanks, \homepage, \altaffiliation all apply to the current author. +% Explanatory text should go in the []'s, +% actual e-mail address or url should go in the {}'s for \email and \homepage. +% Please use the appropriate macro for the type of information + +% \affiliation command applies to all authors since the last \affiliation command. +% The \affiliation command should follow the other information. + +\author{} +%\email[]{Your e-mail address} +%\homepage[]{Your web page} +%\thanks{} +%\altaffiliation{} +\affiliation{} + +% Collaboration name, if desired (requires use of superscriptaddress option in \documentclass). +% \noaffiliation is required (may also be used with the \author command). +%\collaboration{} +%\noaffiliation + +\date{\today} + +\begin{abstract} +% insert abstract here +\end{abstract} + +\maketitle %\maketitle must follow title, authors, abstract + +% Body of paper goes here. Use proper sectioning commands. +% References should be done using the \cite, \ref, and \label commands +\section{} +%\label{} +\subsection{} +\subsubsection{} + +% If in two-column mode, this environment will change to single-column format so that long equations can be displayed. +% Use only when necessary. +%\begin{widetext} +%$$\mbox{put long equation here}$$ +%\end{widetext} + +% Figures should be put into the text as floats. +% Use the graphics or graphicx packages (distributed with LaTeX2e). +% See the LaTeX Graphics Companion by Michel Goosens, Sebastian Rahtz, and Frank Mittelbach for examples. +% +% Here is an example of the general form of a figure: +% Fill in the caption in the braces of the \caption{} command. +% Put the label that you will use with \ref{} command in the braces of the \label{} command. +% +% \begin{figure} +% \includegraphics{}% +% \caption{\label{}}% +% \end{figure} + +% Tables may be be put in the text as floats. +% Here is an example of the general form of a table: +% Fill in the caption in the braces of the \caption{} command. Put the label +% that you will use with \ref{} command in the braces of the \label{} command. +% Insert the column specifiers (l, r, c, d, etc.) in the empty braces of the +% \begin{tabular}{} command. +% +% \begin{table} +% \caption{\label{} } +% \begin{tabular}{} +% \end{tabular} +% \end{table} + +% If you have acknowledgments, this puts in the proper section head. +%\begin{acknowledgments} +% Put your acknowledgments here. +%\end{acknowledgments} + +% Create the reference section using BibTeX: +\bibliography{your-bib-file} + +\end{document} +% +% ****** End of file aapmtemplate.tex ****** diff --git a/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aapm/fig_1.eps b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aapm/fig_1.eps new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8bc5bc8 --- /dev/null +++ b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aapm/fig_1.eps @@ -0,0 +1,5 @@ +%!PS-Adobe-3.0 +%%BoundingBox: 0 0 100 100 +0 0 moveto 100 0 lineto 100 100 lineto 0 100 lineto 0 0 lineto stroke +20 50 moveto /Times findfont 10 scalefont setfont (Test Figure) show +%%EOF diff --git a/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aapm/fig_2.eps b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aapm/fig_2.eps new file mode 100644 index 0000000..cda6149 --- /dev/null +++ b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aapm/fig_2.eps @@ -0,0 +1,5 @@ +%!PS-Adobe-3.0 +%%BoundingBox: 0 0 500 80 +0 0 moveto 500 0 lineto 500 80 lineto 0 80 lineto 0 0 lineto stroke +200 40 moveto /Times findfont 10 scalefont setfont (Wide Test Figure) show +%%EOF diff --git a/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/aipsamp.bib b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/aipsamp.bib new file mode 100644 index 0000000..458a4b7 --- /dev/null +++ b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/aipsamp.bib @@ -0,0 +1,482 @@ +@PREAMBLE{ + "\providecommand{\noopsort}[1]{}" + # "\providecommand{\singleletter}[1]{#1}%" +} + +@BOOK{Bire82, + author = {N. D. Birell and P. C. W. Davies}, + year = 1982, + title = {Quantum Fields in Curved Space}, + publisher = {Cambridge University Press} +} + +@ARTICLE{feyn54, + author = "R. P. Feynman", + year = "1954", + journal = "Phys.\ Rev.", + volume = "94", + pages = "262", +} + +@ARTICLE{epr, + author = "A. Einstein and {\relax Yu} Podolsky and N. Rosen", + year = "1935", + journal = "Phys.\ Rev.", + volume = "47", + pages = "777", +} + +@ARTICLE{Berman1983, + author = "Berman, Jr., G. P. and Izrailev, Jr., F. M.", + title = "Stability of nonlinear modes", + journal = "Physica D", + volume = "88", + pages = "445", + year = "1983", +} + +@ARTICLE{Davies1998, + author = "E. B. Davies and L. Parns", + title = "Trapped modes in acoustic waveguides", + journal = "Q. J. Mech. Appl. Math.", + volume = "51", + pages = "477--492", + year = "1988", +} + +@MISC{witten2001, + author = "Edward Witten", + eprint = "hep-th/0106109", + year = "2001", +} + +@INBOOK{Beutler1994, + author = "E. Beutler", + editor = "E. Beutler and M. A. Lichtman and B. W. Coller and T. S. Kipps", + title = "Williams Hematology", + chapter = "7", + pages = "654--662", + publisher = "McGraw-Hill", + year = "1994", + + edition = "5", + address = "New York", + volume = "2", +} + +@INBOOK{inbook-full, + author = "Donald E. Knuth", + title = "Fundamental Algorithms", + volume = 1, + series = "The Art of Computer Programming", + publisher = "Addison-Wesley", + address = "Reading, Massachusetts", + edition = "Second", + month = "10~" # jan, + year = "\noopsort{1973b}1973", + type = "Section", + chapter = "1.2", + pages = "10--119", + note = "A full INBOOK entry", +} + +@ARTICLE{Smith2005, + author = "J. S. Smith and G. W. Johnson", + journal = "Philos. Trans. R. Soc. London, Ser. B", + title = "", + year = "2005", + + volume = "777", + pages = "1395", +} + +@UNPUBLISHED{Smith2010, + author = "W. J. Smith and T. J. Johnson and B. G. Miller", + title = "Surface chemistry and preferential crystal orientation on a silicon surface", + note = "{J. Appl. Phys.} (unpublished)", + + month = "", + year = "", +} + +@UNPUBLISHED{Smith2010a, + author = "V. K. Smith and K. Johnson and M. O. Klein", + title = "Surface chemistry and preferential crystal orientation on a silicon surface", + note = "{J. Appl. Phys.} (submitted)", + + month = "", + year = "", +} + +@UNPUBLISHED{unpublished-full, + author = "Ulrich {\"{U}}nderwood and Ned {\~N}et and Paul {\={P}}ot", + title = "Lower Bounds for Wishful Research Results", + month = nov # ", " # dec, + year = 1988, + note = "Talk at Fanstord University (A full UNPUBLISHED entry)", +} + +@MISC{JohnsonMillerSmith2007, + + author = "M. P. Johnson and K. L. Miller and K. Smith", + title = "", + howpublished = "personal communication", + month = "1~" # may, + year = "2007", + note = "", +} + +@PROCEEDINGS{Smith2007, + title = "AIP Conf. Proc.", + year = "2007", + + editor = "J. Smith", + volume = "841", + number = "21", + series = "", + address = "", + month = "", + organization = "", + publisher = "", + note = "", +} + +@PROCEEDINGS{proceedings-full, + editor = "Wizard V. Oz and Mihalis Yannakakis", + title = "Proc. Fifteenth Annual", + number = 17, + series = "All ACM Conferences", + month = mar, + year = 1983, + address = "Boston", + organization = "ACM", + publisher = "Academic Press", + note = "A full PROCEEDINGS entry", +} + +@UNPUBLISHED{Burstyn2004, + author = "Y. Burstyn", + title = "{Proceedings of the 5th International Molecular Beam Epitaxy Conference, Santa Fe, NM}", + note = "(unpublished)", + + month = "5--8~" # oct, + year = "2004", +} + +@PROCEEDINGS{Quinn2001, + title = "{Proceedings of the 2003 Particle Accelerator Conference, Portland, OR, 12-16 May 2005}", + year = "2001", + + editor = "B. Quinn", + address = "New York", + publisher = "Wiley", + note = "Albeit the conference was held in 2005, it was the 2003 conference, and the proceedings were published in 2001; go figure", +} + +@ARTICLE{Agarwal2001, + author = "A. G. Agarwal", + title = "{Proceedings of the Fifth Low Temperature Conference, Madison, WI, 1999}", + journal = "Semiconductors", + year = "2001", + + volume = "66", + pages = "1238", +} + +@ARTICLE{SmithDA01, + author = "R. Smith", + title = "Hummingbirds are our friends", + journal = {J. Appl. Phys. (these proceedings)}, + year = "", + volume = "", + number = "", + pages = "", + month = "", + note = "Abstract No. DA-01", +} + +@ARTICLE{Smith2007a, + author = "J. Smith", + title = "", + journal = "Proc. SPIE", + year = "2007", + + volume = "124", + pages = "367", + note = "Required title is missing", +} + +@TECHREPORT{techreport-full, + author = "Tom T{\'{e}}rrific", + title = "An {$O(n \log n / \! \log\log n)$} Sorting Algorithm", + institution = "Fanstord University", + type = "Wishful Research Result", + number = "7", + address = "Computer Science Department, Fanstord, California", + month = oct, + year = 1988, + note = "A full TECHREPORT entry", +} + +@TECHREPORT{Nelson1999, + author = "J. Nelson", + type = "{TWI Report}", + number = "666/1999", + institution = "", + year = jan # "~1999", + + note = "Required institution missing", +} + +@TECHREPORT{Fields2005, + author = "W. K. Fields", + type = "{ECE Report No.}", + number = "AL944", + institution = "", + year = "2005", + + note = "Required institution missing", +} + +@MISC{Zalkins2008, + + author = "Y. M. Zalkins", + title = "", + howpublished = "e-print arXiv:cond-mat/040426", + month = "", + year = "2008", + note = "", +} + +@MISC{Nelson2005, + + author = "J. Nelson", + howpublished = "{U.S. Patent No.} 5,693,000", + year = "12~" # dec # "~2005", +} + +@MASTERSTHESIS{Nelson1999a, + author = "J. K. Nelson", + title = "", + school = "New York University", + year = "1999", + + type = "M.{S}. thesis", + address = "", + month = "", + note = "", +} + +@MASTERSTHESIS{mastersthesis-full, + author = "{\'{E}}douard Masterly", + title = "Mastering Thesis Writing", + school = "Stanford University", + type = "Master's project", + address = "English Department", + month = jun # "-" # aug, + year = 1988, + note = "A full MASTERSTHESIS entry", +} + +@PHDTHESIS{Smith2003, + author = "S. M. Smith", + title = "", + school = "Massachusetts Institute of Technology", + year = "2003", + + type = "{Ph.D.} thesis", + address = "", + month = "", + note = "", +} + +@ARTICLE{KawaLin2003, + author = "S. R. Kawa and S.-J. Lin", + title = "", + journal = "J. Geophys. Res.", + year = "2003", + + volume = "108", + number = "D6", + pages = "4201", + month = "", + note = "{DOI:10.1029/2002JD002268}", +} + +@PHDTHESIS{phdthesis-full, + author = "F. Phidias Phony-Baloney", + title = "Fighting Fire with Fire: Festooning {F}rench Phrases", + school = "Fanstord University", + type = "{PhD} Dissertation", + address = "Department of French", + month = jun # "-" # aug, + year = 1988, + note = "A full PHDTHESIS entry", +} + +@BOOK{book-full, + author = "Donald E. Knuth", + title = "Seminumerical Algorithms", + volume = 2, + series = "The Art of Computer Programming", + publisher = "Addison-Wesley", + address = "Reading, Massachusetts", + edition = "Second", + month = "10~" # jan, + year = "\noopsort{1973c}1981", + note = "A full BOOK entry", +} + +@BOOKLET{booklet-full, + author = "Jill C. Knvth", + title = "The Programming of Computer Art", + howpublished = "Vernier Art Center", + address = "Stanford, California", + month = feb, + year = 1988, + note = "A full BOOKLET entry", +} + +@INBOOK{ballagh2000, + author = "R. Ballagh and C.M. Savage", + editor = "C.M. Savage and M. Das", + title = "Bose-Einstein condensation: from atomic physics to quantum fluids, Proceedings of the 13th Physics Summer School", + year = "2000", + publisher = "World Scientific", + address = "Singapore", + eprint = "cond-mat/0008070", +} + +@inBook{Magnetism, + author = "W. Opechowski and R. Guccione", + title = "Introduction to the Theory of Normal Metals", + volume = "IIa", + pages = "105", + editor = "G. T. Rado and H. Suhl", + booktitle = "Magnetism", + publisher = "Academic Press", + address = "New York", +} + year = "1965", + +@INPROCEEDINGS{Magnetismb, + author = "W. Opechowski and R. Guccione", + title = "Introduction to the Theory of Normal Metals", + editor = "G. T. Rado and H. Suhl", + booktitle = "Magnetism", + volume = "IIa", + pages = "105", + publisher = "Academic Press", + address = "New York", + year = "1965", +} + +@INBOOK{Smith80, + author = "J. M. Smith", + title = "Molecular Dynamics", + publisher = "Academic", + year = "1980", + address = "New York", + editor = "C. Brown", +} + +@article{ZS71, + author = "V. E. Zakharov and A. B. Shabat", + year = "1971", + title = "Exact theory of two-dimensional self-focusing and one-dimensional self-modulation of waves in nonlinear media", + journal = "Zh. Eksp. Teor. Fiz.", + volume = "61", + pages = "118--134", + translation = "Sov. Phys. JETP \textbf{34}, 62 (1972)" +} + +@INCOLLECTION{Beutler1994a, + author = "E. Beutler", + year = "1994", + booktitle = "Williams Hematology", + edition = "5", + chapter = "7", + editor = "E. Beutler and M. A. Lichtman and B. W. Coller and T. S. Kipps", + publisher = "McGraw-Hill", + address = "New York", + volume = "2", + pages = "654--662", +} + +@INCOLLECTION{ballagh2000a, + author = "R. Ballagh and C.M. Savage", + year = "2000", + title = "Bose-Einstein condensation: from atomic physics to quantum fluids", + booktitle = "Proceedings of the 13th Physics Summer School", + editor = "C.M. Savage and M. Das", + publisher = "World Scientific", + address = "Singapore", + eprint = "cond-mat/0008070", +} + +@INCOLLECTION{Magnetisma, + author = "W. Opechowski and R. Guccione", + year = "1965", + title = "Introduction to the Theory of Normal Metals", + booktitle = "Magnetism", + editor = "G. T. Rado and H. Suhl", + publisher = "Academic Press", + address = "New York", + volume = "IIa", + pages = "105", +} + +@INCOLLECTION{Smith80a, + author = "J. M. Smith", + year = "1980", + booktitle = "Molecular Dynamics", + editor = "C. Brown", + publisher = "Academic", + address = "New York", +} + +@INCOLLECTION{incollection-full, + key = "incol-ful", + author = "Daniel D. Lincoll", + year = 1977, + title = "Semigroups of Recurrences", + booktitle = "High Speed Computer and Algorithm Organization", + edition = "Third", + series = "Fast Computers", + number = 23, + chapter = 3, + type = "Part", + editor = "David J. Lipcoll and D. H. Lawrie and A. H. Sameh", + publisher = "Academic Press", + address = "New York", + month = sep, + pages = "179--183", + note = "A full INCOLLECTION entry", +} + +@INPROCEEDINGS{inproceedings-full, + author = "Alfred V. Oaho and Jeffrey D. Ullman and Mihalis Yannakakis", + title = "On Notions of Information Transfer in {VLSI} Circuits", + editor = "Wizard V. Oz and Mihalis Yannakakis", + booktitle = "Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM", + number = 17, + series = "All ACM Conferences", + pages = "133--139", + month = mar, + year = 1983, + address = "Boston", + organization = "ACM", + publisher = "Academic Press", + note = "A full INPROCEDINGS entry", +} + +@MANUAL{manual-full, + author = "Larry Manmaker", + title = "The Definitive Computer Manual", + organization = "Chips-R-Us", + address = "Silicon Valley", + edition = "Silver", + month = apr # "-" # may, + year = 1986, + note = "A full MANUAL entry", +} diff --git a/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/aipsamp.pdf b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/aipsamp.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..185f5c7 --- /dev/null +++ b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/aipsamp.pdf diff --git a/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/aipsamp.tex b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/aipsamp.tex new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c2416f9 --- /dev/null +++ b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/aipsamp.tex @@ -0,0 +1,610 @@ +% ****** Start of file aipsamp.tex ****** +% +% This file is part of the AIP files in the AIP distribution for REVTeX 4. +% Version 4.2a of REVTeX, December 2014 +% +% Copyright (c) 2014 American Institute of Physics. +% +% See the AIP README file for restrictions and more information. +% +% TeX'ing this file requires that you have AMS-LaTeX 2.0 installed +% as well as the rest of the prerequisites for REVTeX 4.2 +% +% It also requires running BibTeX. The commands are as follows: +% +% 1) latex aipsamp +% 2) bibtex aipsamp +% 3) latex aipsamp +% 4) latex aipsamp +% +% Use this file as a source of example code for your aip document. +% Use the file aiptemplate.tex as a template for your document. +\documentclass[% + aip, + jmp,% + amsmath,amssymb, +%preprint,% + reprint,% +%author-year,% +%author-numerical,% +]{revtex4-2} + +\usepackage{graphicx}% Include figure files +\usepackage{dcolumn}% Align table columns on decimal point +\usepackage{bm}% bold math +%\usepackage[mathlines]{lineno}% Enable numbering of text and display math +%\linenumbers\relax % Commence numbering lines + +\begin{document} + +\preprint{AIP/123-QED} + +\title[Sample title]{Sample Title:\\with Forced Linebreak\footnote{Error!}}% Force line breaks with \\ +\thanks{Footnote to title of article.} + +\author{A. Author} + \altaffiliation[Also at ]{Physics Department, XYZ University.}%Lines break automatically or can be forced with \\ +\author{B. Author}% + \email{Second.Author@institution.edu.} +\affiliation{ +Authors' institution and/or address%\\This line break forced with \textbackslash\textbackslash +}% + +\author{C. Author} + \homepage{http://www.Second.institution.edu/~Charlie.Author.} +\affiliation{% +Second institution and/or address%\\This line break forced% with \\ +}% + +\date{\today}% It is always \today, today, + % but any date may be explicitly specified + +\begin{abstract} +An article usually includes an abstract, a concise summary of the work +covered at length in the main body of the article. It is used for +secondary publications and for information retrieval purposes. +% +\end{abstract} + +\keywords{Suggested keywords}%Use showkeys class option if keyword + %display desired +\maketitle + +\begin{quotation} +The ``lead paragraph'' is encapsulated with the \LaTeX\ +\verb+quotation+ environment and is formatted as a single paragraph before the first section heading. +(The \verb+quotation+ environment reverts to its usual meaning after the first sectioning command.) +Note that numbered references are allowed in the lead paragraph. +% +The lead paragraph will only be found in an article being prepared for the journal \textit{Chaos}. +\end{quotation} + +\section{\label{sec:level1}First-level heading:\protect\\ The line +break was forced \lowercase{via} \textbackslash\textbackslash} + +This sample document demonstrates proper use of REV\TeX~4.2 (and +\LaTeXe) in manuscripts prepared for submission to AIP +journals. Further information can be found in the documentation included in the distribution or available at +\url{http://authors.aip.org} and in the documentation for +REV\TeX~4.2 itself. + +When commands are referred to in this example file, they are always +shown with their required arguments, using normal \TeX{} format. In +this format, \verb+#1+, \verb+#2+, etc. stand for required +author-supplied arguments to commands. For example, in +\verb+\section{#1}+ the \verb+#1+ stands for the title text of the +author's section heading, and in \verb+\title{#1}+ the \verb+#1+ +stands for the title text of the paper. + +Line breaks in section headings at all levels can be introduced using +\textbackslash\textbackslash. A blank input line tells \TeX\ that the +paragraph has ended. + +\subsection{\label{sec:level2}Second-level heading: Formatting} + +This file may be formatted in both the \texttt{preprint} (the default) and +\texttt{reprint} styles; the latter format may be used to +mimic final journal output. Either format may be used for submission +purposes; however, for peer review and production, AIP will format the +article using the \texttt{preprint} class option. Hence, it is +essential that authors check that their manuscripts format acceptably +under \texttt{preprint}. Manuscripts submitted to AIP that do not +format correctly under the \texttt{preprint} option may be delayed in +both the editorial and production processes. + +The \texttt{widetext} environment will make the text the width of the +full page, as on page~\pageref{eq:wideeq}. (Note the use the +\verb+\pageref{#1}+ to get the page number right automatically.) The +width-changing commands only take effect in \texttt{twocolumn} +formatting. It has no effect if \texttt{preprint} formatting is chosen +instead. + +\subsubsection{\label{sec:level3}Third-level heading: Citations and Footnotes} + +Citations in text refer to entries in the Bibliography; +they use the commands \verb+\cite{#1}+ or \verb+\onlinecite{#1}+. +Because REV\TeX\ uses the \verb+natbib+ package of Patrick Daly, +its entire repertoire of commands are available in your document; +see the \verb+natbib+ documentation for further details. +The argument of \verb+\cite+ is a comma-separated list of \emph{keys}; +a key may consist of letters and numerals. + +By default, citations are numerical; \cite{feyn54} author-year citations are an option. +To give a textual citation, use \verb+\onlinecite{#1}+: (Refs.~\onlinecite{witten2001,epr,Bire82}). +REV\TeX\ ``collapses'' lists of consecutive numerical citations when appropriate. +REV\TeX\ provides the ability to properly punctuate textual citations in author-year style; +this facility works correctly with numerical citations only with \texttt{natbib}'s compress option turned off. +To illustrate, we cite several together \cite{feyn54,witten2001,epr,Berman1983}, +and once again (Refs.~\onlinecite{epr,feyn54,Bire82,Berman1983}). +Note that, when numerical citations are used, the references were sorted into the same order they appear in the bibliography. + +A reference within the bibliography is specified with a \verb+\bibitem{#1}+ command, +where the argument is the citation key mentioned above. +\verb+\bibitem{#1}+ commands may be crafted by hand or, preferably, +generated by using Bib\TeX. +The AIP styles for REV\TeX~4 include Bib\TeX\ style files +\verb+aipnum.bst+ and \verb+aipauth.bst+, appropriate for +numbered and author-year bibliographies, +respectively. +REV\TeX~4 will automatically choose the style appropriate for +the document's selected class options: the default is numerical, and +you obtain the author-year style by specifying a class option of \verb+author-year+. + +This sample file demonstrates a simple use of Bib\TeX\ +via a \verb+\bibliography+ command referencing the \verb+aipsamp.bib+ file. +Running Bib\TeX\ (in this case \texttt{bibtex +aipsamp}) after the first pass of \LaTeX\ produces the file +\verb+aipsamp.bbl+ which contains the automatically formatted +\verb+\bibitem+ commands (including extra markup information via +\verb+\bibinfo+ commands). If not using Bib\TeX, the +\verb+thebibiliography+ environment should be used instead. + +\paragraph{Fourth-level heading is run in.}% +Footnotes are produced using the \verb+\footnote{#1}+ command. +Numerical style citations put footnotes into the +bibliography\footnote{Automatically placing footnotes into the bibliography requires using BibTeX to compile the bibliography.}. +Author-year and numerical author-year citation styles (each for its own reason) cannot use this method. +Note: due to the method used to place footnotes in the bibliography, \emph{you +must re-run BibTeX every time you change any of your document's +footnotes}. + +\section{Math and Equations} +Inline math may be typeset using the \verb+$+ delimiters. Bold math +symbols may be achieved using the \verb+bm+ package and the +\verb+\bm{#1}+ command it supplies. For instance, a bold $\alpha$ can +be typeset as \verb+$\bm{\alpha}$+ giving $\bm{\alpha}$. Fraktur and +Blackboard (or open face or double struck) characters should be +typeset using the \verb+\mathfrak{#1}+ and \verb+\mathbb{#1}+ commands +respectively. Both are supplied by the \texttt{amssymb} package. For +example, \verb+$\mathbb{R}$+ gives $\mathbb{R}$ and +\verb+$\mathfrak{G}$+ gives $\mathfrak{G}$ + +In \LaTeX\ there are many different ways to display equations, and a +few preferred ways are noted below. Displayed math will center by +default. Use the class option \verb+fleqn+ to flush equations left. + +Below we have numbered single-line equations, the most common kind: +\begin{eqnarray} +\chi_+(p)\alt{\bf [}2|{\bf p}|(|{\bf p}|+p_z){\bf ]}^{-1/2} +\left( +\begin{array}{c} +|{\bf p}|+p_z\\ +px+ip_y +\end{array}\right)\;, +\\ +\left\{% + \openone234567890abc123\alpha\beta\gamma\delta1234556\alpha\beta + \frac{1\sum^{a}_{b}}{A^2}% +\right\}% +\label{eq:one}. +\end{eqnarray} +Note the open one in Eq.~(\ref{eq:one}). + +Not all numbered equations will fit within a narrow column this +way. The equation number will move down automatically if it cannot fit +on the same line with a one-line equation: +\begin{equation} +\left\{ + ab12345678abc123456abcdef\alpha\beta\gamma\delta1234556\alpha\beta + \frac{1\sum^{a}_{b}}{A^2}% +\right\}. +\end{equation} + +When the \verb+\label{#1}+ command is used [cf. input for +Eq.~(\ref{eq:one})], the equation can be referred to in text without +knowing the equation number that \TeX\ will assign to it. Just +use \verb+\ref{#1}+, where \verb+#1+ is the same name that used in +the \verb+\label{#1}+ command. + +Unnumbered single-line equations can be typeset +using the \verb+\[+, \verb+\]+ format: +\[g^+g^+ \rightarrow g^+g^+g^+g^+ \dots ~,~~q^+q^+\rightarrow +q^+g^+g^+ \dots ~. \] + +\subsection{Multiline equations} + +Multiline equations are obtained by using the \verb+eqnarray+ +environment. Use the \verb+\nonumber+ command at the end of each line +to avoid assigning a number: +\begin{eqnarray} +{\cal M}=&&ig_Z^2(4E_1E_2)^{1/2}(l_i^2)^{-1} +\delta_{\sigma_1,-\sigma_2} +(g_{\sigma_2}^e)^2\chi_{-\sigma_2}(p_2)\nonumber\\ +&&\times +[\epsilon_jl_i\epsilon_i]_{\sigma_1}\chi_{\sigma_1}(p_1), +\end{eqnarray} +\begin{eqnarray} +\sum \vert M^{\text{viol}}_g \vert ^2&=&g^{2n-4}_S(Q^2)~N^{n-2} + (N^2-1)\nonumber \\ + & &\times \left( \sum_{i<j}\right) + \sum_{\text{perm}} + \frac{1}{S_{12}} + \frac{1}{S_{12}} + \sum_\tau c^f_\tau~. +\end{eqnarray} +\textbf{Note:} Do not use \verb+\label{#1}+ on a line of a multiline +equation if \verb+\nonumber+ is also used on that line. Incorrect +cross-referencing will result. Notice the use \verb+\text{#1}+ for +using a Roman font within a math environment. + +To set a multiline equation without \emph{any} equation +numbers, use the \verb+\begin{eqnarray*}+, +\verb+\end{eqnarray*}+ format: +\begin{eqnarray*} +\sum \vert M^{\text{viol}}_g \vert ^2&=&g^{2n-4}_S(Q^2)~N^{n-2} + (N^2-1)\\ + & &\times \left( \sum_{i<j}\right) + \left( + \sum_{\text{perm}}\frac{1}{S_{12}S_{23}S_{n1}} + \right) + \frac{1}{S_{12}}~. +\end{eqnarray*} +To obtain numbers not normally produced by the automatic numbering, +use the \verb+\tag{#1}+ command, where \verb+#1+ is the desired +equation number. For example, to get an equation number of +(\ref{eq:mynum}), +\begin{equation} +g^+g^+ \rightarrow g^+g^+g^+g^+ \dots ~,~~q^+q^+\rightarrow +q^+g^+g^+ \dots ~. \tag{2.6$'$}\label{eq:mynum} +\end{equation} + +A few notes on \verb=\tag{#1}=. \verb+\tag{#1}+ requires +\texttt{amsmath}. The \verb+\tag{#1}+ must come before the +\verb+\label{#1}+, if any. The numbering set with \verb+\tag{#1}+ is +\textit{transparent} to the automatic numbering in REV\TeX{}; +therefore, the number must be known ahead of time, and it must be +manually adjusted if other equations are added. \verb+\tag{#1}+ works +with both single-line and multiline equations. \verb+\tag{#1}+ should +only be used in exceptional case - do not use it to number all +equations in a paper. + +Enclosing single-line and multiline equations in +\verb+\begin{subequations}+ and \verb+\end{subequations}+ will produce +a set of equations that are ``numbered'' with letters, as shown in +Eqs.~(\ref{subeq:1}) and (\ref{subeq:2}) below: +\begin{subequations} +\label{eq:whole} +\begin{equation} +\left\{ + abc123456abcdef\alpha\beta\gamma\delta1234556\alpha\beta + \frac{1\sum^{a}_{b}}{A^2} +\right\},\label{subeq:1} +\end{equation} +\begin{eqnarray} +{\cal M}=&&ig_Z^2(4E_1E_2)^{1/2}(l_i^2)^{-1} +(g_{\sigma_2}^e)^2\chi_{-\sigma_2}(p_2)\nonumber\\ +&&\times +[\epsilon_i]_{\sigma_1}\chi_{\sigma_1}(p_1).\label{subeq:2} +\end{eqnarray} +\end{subequations} +Putting a \verb+\label{#1}+ command right after the +\verb+\begin{subequations}+, allows one to +reference all the equations in a subequations environment. For +example, the equations in the preceding subequations environment were +Eqs.~(\ref{eq:whole}). + +\subsubsection{Wide equations} +The equation that follows is set in a wide format, i.e., it spans +across the full page. The wide format is reserved for long equations +that cannot be easily broken into four lines or less: +\begin{widetext} +\begin{equation} +{\cal R}^{(\text{d})}= + g_{\sigma_2}^e + \left( + \frac{[\Gamma^Z(3,21)]_{\sigma_1}}{Q_{12}^2-M_W^2} + +\frac{[\Gamma^Z(13,2)]_{\sigma_1}}{Q_{13}^2-M_W^2} + \right) + + x_WQ_e + \left( + \frac{[\Gamma^\gamma(3,21)]_{\sigma_1}}{Q_{12}^2-M_W^2} + +\frac{[\Gamma^\gamma(13,2)]_{\sigma_1}}{Q_{13}^2-M_W^2} + \right)\;. \label{eq:wideeq} +\end{equation} +\end{widetext} +This is typed to show the output is in wide format. +(Since there is no input line between \verb+\equation+ and +this paragraph, there is no paragraph indent for this paragraph.) +\section{Cross-referencing} +REV\TeX{} will automatically number sections, equations, figure +captions, and tables. In order to reference them in text, use the +\verb+\label{#1}+ and \verb+\ref{#1}+ commands. To reference a +particular page, use the \verb+\pageref{#1}+ command. + +The \verb+\label{#1}+ should appear in a section heading, within an +equation, or in a table or figure caption. The \verb+\ref{#1}+ command +is used in the text where the citation is to be displayed. Some +examples: Section~\ref{sec:level1} on page~\pageref{sec:level1}, +Table~\ref{tab:table1},% +\begin{table} +\caption{\label{tab:table1}This is a narrow table which fits into a +text column when using \texttt{twocolumn} formatting. Note that +REV\TeX~4 adjusts the intercolumn spacing so that the table fills the +entire width of the column. Table captions are numbered +automatically. This table illustrates left-aligned, centered, and +right-aligned columns. } +\begin{ruledtabular} +\begin{tabular}{lcr} +Left\footnote{Note a.}&Centered\footnote{Note b.}&Right\\ +\hline +1 & 2 & 3\\ +10 & 20 & 30\\ +100 & 200 & 300\\ +\end{tabular} +\end{ruledtabular} +\end{table} +and Fig.~\ref{fig:epsart}. + +\section{Figures and Tables} +Figures and tables are typically ``floats''; \LaTeX\ determines their +final position via placement rules. +\LaTeX\ isn't always successful in automatically placing floats where you wish them. + +Figures are marked up with the \texttt{figure} environment, the content of which +imports the image (\verb+\includegraphics+) followed by the figure caption (\verb+\caption+). +The argument of the latter command should itself contain a \verb+\label+ command if you +wish to refer to your figure with \verb+\ref+. + +Import your image using either the \texttt{graphics} or +\texttt{graphix} packages. These packages both define the +\verb+\includegraphics{#1}+ command, but they differ in the optional +arguments for specifying the orientation, scaling, and translation of the figure. +Fig.~\ref{fig:epsart}% +\begin{figure} +\includegraphics{fig_1}% Here is how to import EPS art +\caption{\label{fig:epsart} A figure caption. The figure captions are +automatically numbered.} +\end{figure} +is small enough to fit in a single column, while +Fig.~\ref{fig:wide}% +\begin{figure*} +\includegraphics{fig_2}% Here is how to import EPS art +\caption{\label{fig:wide}Use the \texttt{figure*} environment to get a wide +figure, spanning the page in \texttt{twocolumn} formatting.} +\end{figure*} +is too wide for a single column, +so instead the \texttt{figure*} environment has been used. + +The analog of the \texttt{figure} environment is \texttt{table}, which uses +the same \verb+\caption+ command. +However, you should type your caption command first within the \texttt{table}, +instead of last as you did for \texttt{figure}. + +The heart of any table is the \texttt{tabular} environment, +which represents the table content as a (vertical) sequence of table rows, +each containing a (horizontal) sequence of table cells. +Cells are separated by the \verb+&+ character; +the row terminates with \verb+\\+. +The required argument for the \texttt{tabular} environment +specifies how data are displayed in each of the columns. +For instance, a column +may be centered (\verb+c+), left-justified (\verb+l+), right-justified (\verb+r+), +or aligned on a decimal point (\verb+d+). +(Table~\ref{tab:table4}% +\begin{table} +\caption{\label{tab:table4}Numbers in columns Three--Five have been +aligned by using the ``d'' column specifier (requires the +\texttt{dcolumn} package). +Non-numeric entries (those entries without +a ``.'') in a ``d'' column are aligned on the decimal point. +Use the +``D'' specifier for more complex layouts. } +\begin{ruledtabular} +\begin{tabular}{ccddd} +One&Two&\mbox{Three}&\mbox{Four}&\mbox{Five}\\ +\hline +one&two&\mbox{three}&\mbox{four}&\mbox{five}\\ +He&2& 2.77234 & 45672. & 0.69 \\ +C\footnote{Some tables require footnotes.} + &C\footnote{Some tables need more than one footnote.} + & 12537.64 & 37.66345 & 86.37 \\ +\end{tabular} +\end{ruledtabular} +\end{table} +illustrates the use of decimal column alignment.) + +Extra column-spacing may be be specified as well, although +REV\TeX~4 sets this spacing so that the columns fill the width of the +table. +Horizontal rules are typeset using the \verb+\hline+ +command. +The doubled (or Scotch) rules that appear at the top and +bottom of a table can be achieved by enclosing the \texttt{tabular} +environment within a \texttt{ruledtabular} environment. +Rows whose columns span multiple columns can be typeset using \LaTeX's +\verb+\multicolumn{#1}{#2}{#3}+ command +(for example, see the first row of Table~\ref{tab:table3}).% +\begin{table*} +\caption{\label{tab:table3}This is a wide table that spans the page +width in \texttt{twocolumn} mode. It is formatted using the +\texttt{table*} environment. It also demonstrates the use of +\textbackslash\texttt{multicolumn} in rows with entries that span +more than one column.} +\begin{ruledtabular} +\begin{tabular}{ccccc} + &\multicolumn{2}{c}{$D_{4h}^1$}&\multicolumn{2}{c}{$D_{4h}^5$}\\ + Ion&1st alternative&2nd alternative&lst alternative +&2nd alternative\\ \hline + K&$(2e)+(2f)$&$(4i)$ &$(2c)+(2d)$&$(4f)$ \\ + Mn&$(2g)$\footnote{The $z$ parameter of these positions is $z\sim\frac{1}{4}$.} + &$(a)+(b)+(c)+(d)$&$(4e)$&$(2a)+(2b)$\\ + Cl&$(a)+(b)+(c)+(d)$&$(2g)$\footnote{This is a footnote in a table that spans the full page +width in \texttt{twocolumn} mode. It is supposed to set on the full width of the page, just as the caption does. } + &$(4e)^{\text{a}}$\\ + He&$(8r)^{\text{a}}$&$(4j)^{\text{a}}$&$(4g)^{\text{a}}$\\ + Ag& &$(4k)^{\text{a}}$& &$(4h)^{\text{a}}$\\ +\end{tabular} +\end{ruledtabular} +\end{table*} + +The tables in this document illustrate various effects. +Tables that fit in a narrow column are contained in a \texttt{table} +environment. +Table~\ref{tab:table3} is a wide table, therefore set with the +\texttt{table*} environment. +Lengthy tables may need to break across pages. +A simple way to allow this is to specify +the \verb+[H]+ float placement on the \texttt{table} or +\texttt{table*} environment. +Alternatively, using the standard \LaTeXe\ package \texttt{longtable} +gives more control over how tables break and allows headers and footers +to be specified for each page of the table. +An example of the use of \texttt{longtable} can be found +in the file \texttt{summary.tex} that is included with the REV\TeX~4 +distribution. + +There are two methods for setting footnotes within a table (these +footnotes will be displayed directly below the table rather than at +the bottom of the page or in the bibliography). +The easiest +and preferred method is just to use the \verb+\footnote{#1}+ +command. This will automatically enumerate the footnotes with +lowercase roman letters. +However, it is sometimes necessary to have +multiple entries in the table share the same footnote. +In this case, +create the footnotes using +\verb+\footnotemark[#1]+ and \verb+\footnotetext[#1]{#2}+. +\texttt{\#1} is a numeric value. +Each time the same value for \texttt{\#1} is used, +the same mark is produced in the table. +The \verb+\footnotetext[#1]{#2}+ commands are placed after the \texttt{tabular} +environment. +Examine the \LaTeX\ source and output for Tables~\ref{tab:table1} and +\ref{tab:table2}% +\begin{table} +\caption{\label{tab:table2}A table with more columns still fits +properly in a column. Note that several entries share the same +footnote. Inspect the \LaTeX\ input for this table to see +exactly how it is done.} +\begin{ruledtabular} +\begin{tabular}{cccccccc} + &$r_c$ (\AA)&$r_0$ (\AA)&$\kappa r_0$& + &$r_c$ (\AA) &$r_0$ (\AA)&$\kappa r_0$\\ +\hline +Cu& 0.800 & 14.10 & 2.550 &Sn\footnotemark[1] +& 0.680 & 1.870 & 3.700 \\ +Ag& 0.990 & 15.90 & 2.710 &Pb\footnotemark[2] +& 0.450 & 1.930 & 3.760 \\ +Au& 1.150 & 15.90 & 2.710 &Ca\footnotemark[3] +& 0.750 & 2.170 & 3.560 \\ +Mg& 0.490 & 17.60 & 3.200 &Sr\footnotemark[4] +& 0.900 & 2.370 & 3.720 \\ +Zn& 0.300 & 15.20 & 2.970 &Li\footnotemark[2] +& 0.380 & 1.730 & 2.830 \\ +Cd& 0.530 & 17.10 & 3.160 &Na\footnotemark[5] +& 0.760 & 2.110 & 3.120 \\ +Hg& 0.550 & 17.80 & 3.220 &K\footnotemark[5] +& 1.120 & 2.620 & 3.480 \\ +Al& 0.230 & 15.80 & 3.240 &Rb\footnotemark[3] +& 1.330 & 2.800 & 3.590 \\ +Ga& 0.310 & 16.70 & 3.330 &Cs\footnotemark[4] +& 1.420 & 3.030 & 3.740 \\ +In& 0.460 & 18.40 & 3.500 &Ba\footnotemark[5] +& 0.960 & 2.460 & 3.780 \\ +Tl& 0.480 & 18.90 & 3.550 & & & & \\ +\end{tabular} +\end{ruledtabular} +\footnotetext[1]{Here's the first, from Ref.~\onlinecite{feyn54}.} +\footnotetext[2]{Here's the second.} +\footnotetext[3]{Here's the third.} +\footnotetext[4]{Here's the fourth.} +\footnotetext[5]{And etc.} +\end{table} +for an illustration. + +All AIP journals require that the initial citation of +figures or tables be in numerical order. +\LaTeX's automatic numbering of floats is your friend here: +just put each \texttt{figure} environment immediately following +its first reference (\verb+\ref+), as we have done in this example file. + +\begin{acknowledgments} +We wish to acknowledge the support of the author community in using +REV\TeX{}, offering suggestions and encouragement, testing new versions, +\dots. +\end{acknowledgments} + +\appendix + +\section{Appendixes} + +To start the appendixes, use the \verb+\appendix+ command. +This signals that all following section commands refer to appendixes +instead of regular sections. Therefore, the \verb+\appendix+ command +should be used only once---to set up the section commands to act as +appendixes. Thereafter normal section commands are used. The heading +for a section can be left empty. For example, +\begin{verbatim} +\appendix +\section{} +\end{verbatim} +will produce an appendix heading that says ``APPENDIX A'' and +\begin{verbatim} +\appendix +\section{Background} +\end{verbatim} +will produce an appendix heading that says ``APPENDIX A: BACKGROUND'' +(note that the colon is set automatically). + +If there is only one appendix, then the letter ``A'' should not +appear. This is suppressed by using the star version of the appendix +command (\verb+\appendix*+ in the place of \verb+\appendix+). + +\section{A little more on appendixes} + +Observe that this appendix was started by using +\begin{verbatim} +\section{A little more on appendixes} +\end{verbatim} + +Note the equation number in an appendix: +\begin{equation} +E=mc^2. +\end{equation} + +\subsection{\label{app:subsec}A subsection in an appendix} + +You can use a subsection or subsubsection in an appendix. Note the +numbering: we are now in Appendix~\ref{app:subsec}. + +\subsubsection{\label{app:subsubsec}A subsubsection in an appendix} +Note the equation numbers in this appendix, produced with the +subequations environment: +\begin{subequations} +\begin{eqnarray} +E&=&mc, \label{appa} +\\ +E&=&mc^2, \label{appb} +\\ +E&\agt& mc^3. \label{appc} +\end{eqnarray} +\end{subequations} +They turn out to be Eqs.~(\ref{appa}), (\ref{appb}), and (\ref{appc}). + +\nocite{*} +\bibliography{aipsamp}% Produces the bibliography via BibTeX. + +\end{document} +% +% ****** End of file aipsamp.tex ****** diff --git a/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/aiptemplate.tex b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/aiptemplate.tex new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c1d22b5 --- /dev/null +++ b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/aiptemplate.tex @@ -0,0 +1,105 @@ +%% ****** Start of file aiptemplate.tex ****** % +%% +%% This file is part of the files in the distribution of AIP substyles for REVTeX4. +%% Version 4.2 of December 2014. +%% +% +% This is a template for producing documents for use with +% the REVTEX 4.2 document class and the AIP substyles. +% +% Copy this file to another name and then work on that file. +% That way, you always have this original template file to use. + +\documentclass[aip,graphicx]{revtex4-2} +%\documentclass[aip,reprint]{revtex4-2} + +\draft % marks overfull lines with a black rule on the right + +\begin{document} + +% Use the \preprint command to place your local institutional report number +% on the title page in preprint mode. +% Multiple \preprint commands are allowed. +%\preprint{} + +\title{} %Title of paper + +% repeat the \author .. \affiliation etc. as needed +% \email, \thanks, \homepage, \altaffiliation all apply to the current author. +% Explanatory text should go in the []'s, +% actual e-mail address or url should go in the {}'s for \email and \homepage. +% Please use the appropriate macro for the type of information + +% \affiliation command applies to all authors since the last \affiliation command. +% The \affiliation command should follow the other information. + +\author{} +%\email[]{Your e-mail address} +%\homepage[]{Your web page} +%\thanks{} +%\altaffiliation{} +\affiliation{} + +% Collaboration name, if desired (requires use of superscriptaddress option in \documentclass). +% \noaffiliation is required (may also be used with the \author command). +%\collaboration{} +%\noaffiliation + +\date{\today} + +\begin{abstract} +% insert abstract here +\end{abstract} + +\maketitle %\maketitle must follow title, authors, abstract + +% Body of paper goes here. Use proper sectioning commands. +% References should be done using the \cite, \ref, and \label commands +\section{} +%\label{} +\subsection{} +\subsubsection{} + +% If in two-column mode, this environment will change to single-column format so that long equations can be displayed. +% Use only when necessary. +%\begin{widetext} +%$$\mbox{put long equation here}$$ +%\end{widetext} + +% Figures should be put into the text as floats. +% Use the graphics or graphicx packages (distributed with LaTeX2e). +% See the LaTeX Graphics Companion by Michel Goosens, Sebastian Rahtz, and Frank Mittelbach for examples. +% +% Here is an example of the general form of a figure: +% Fill in the caption in the braces of the \caption{} command. +% Put the label that you will use with \ref{} command in the braces of the \label{} command. +% +% \begin{figure} +% \includegraphics{}% +% \caption{\label{}}% +% \end{figure} + +% Tables may be be put in the text as floats. +% Here is an example of the general form of a table: +% Fill in the caption in the braces of the \caption{} command. Put the label +% that you will use with \ref{} command in the braces of the \label{} command. +% Insert the column specifiers (l, r, c, d, etc.) in the empty braces of the +% \begin{tabular}{} command. +% +% \begin{table} +% \caption{\label{} } +% \begin{tabular}{} +% \end{tabular} +% \end{table} + +% If you have acknowledgments, this puts in the proper section head. +%\begin{acknowledgments} +% Put your acknowledgments here. +%\end{acknowledgments} + +% Create the reference section using BibTeX: +\bibliography{your-bib-file} + +\end{document} +% +% ****** End of file aiptemplate.tex ****** diff --git a/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/fig_1.eps b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/fig_1.eps new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8bc5bc8 --- /dev/null +++ b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/fig_1.eps @@ -0,0 +1,5 @@ +%!PS-Adobe-3.0 +%%BoundingBox: 0 0 100 100 +0 0 moveto 100 0 lineto 100 100 lineto 0 100 lineto 0 0 lineto stroke +20 50 moveto /Times findfont 10 scalefont setfont (Test Figure) show +%%EOF diff --git a/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/fig_2.eps b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/fig_2.eps new file mode 100644 index 0000000..cda6149 --- /dev/null +++ b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/fig_2.eps @@ -0,0 +1,5 @@ +%!PS-Adobe-3.0 +%%BoundingBox: 0 0 500 80 +0 0 moveto 500 0 lineto 500 80 lineto 0 80 lineto 0 0 lineto stroke +200 40 moveto /Times findfont 10 scalefont setfont (Wide Test Figure) show +%%EOF diff --git a/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/apssamp.bib b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/apssamp.bib new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ff2eace --- /dev/null +++ b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/apssamp.bib @@ -0,0 +1,484 @@ +@PREAMBLE{ + "\providecommand{\noopsort}[1]{}" + # "\providecommand{\singleletter}[1]{#1}%" +} + +@BOOK{Bire82, + author = {N. D. Birell and P. C. W. Davies}, + year = 1982, + title = {Quantum Fields in Curved Space}, + publisher = {Cambridge University Press} +} + +@ARTICLE{feyn54, + author = "R. P. Feynman", + year = "1954", + journal = "Phys.\ Rev.", + volume = "94", + pages = "262", +} + +@ARTICLE{epr, + author = "A. Einstein and {\relax Yu} Podolsky and N. Rosen", + collaboration = "EPR", + year = "1935", + journal = "Phys.\ Rev.", + volume = "47", + pages = "777", +} + +@ARTICLE{Berman1983, + author = "G. P. Berman, Jr. and F. M. Izrailev, Jr.", + title = "Stability of nonlinear modes", + journal = "Physica D", + volume = "88", + pages = "445", + year = "1983", +} + +@ARTICLE{Davies1998, + author = "E. B. Davies and L. Parns", + title = "Trapped modes in acoustic waveguides", + journal = "Q. J. Mech. Appl. Math.", + volume = "51", + pages = "477--492", + year = "1988", +} + +@MISC{witten2001, + author = "Edward Witten", + eprint = "hep-th/0106109", + year = "2001", +} + +@INBOOK{Beutler1994, + author = "E. Beutler", + editor = "E. Beutler and M. A. Lichtman and B. W. Coller and T. S. Kipps", + booktitle = "Williams Hematology", + chapter = "7", + pages = "654--662", + publisher = "McGraw-Hill", + year = "1994", + + edition = "5", + address = "New York", + volume = "2", +} + +@INCOLLECTION{Beutler1994a, + author = "E. Beutler", + editor = "E. Beutler and M. A. Lichtman and B. W. Coller and T. S. Kipps", + booktitle = "Williams Hematology", + chapter = "7", + pages = "654--662", + publisher = "McGraw-Hill", + year = "1994", + + edition = "5", + address = "New York", + volume = "2", +} + +@INBOOK{inbook-full, + author = "Donald E. Knuth", + booktitle = "Fundamental Algorithms", + volume = 1, + series = "The Art of Computer Programming", + publisher = "Addison-Wesley", + address = "Reading, Massachusetts", + edition = "Second", + month = "10~" # jan, + year = "\noopsort{1973b}1973", + type = "Section", + chapter = "1.2", + pages = "10--119", + note = "A full INBOOK entry", +} + +@ARTICLE{Smith2005, + author = "J. S. Smith and G. W. Johnson", + journal = "Philos. Trans. R. Soc. London, Ser. B", + title = "", + year = "2005", + + volume = "777", + pages = "1395", +} + +@UNPUBLISHED{Smith2010, + author = "W. J. Smith and T. J. Johnson and B. G. Miller", + title = "Surface chemistry and preferential crystal orientation on a silicon surface", + note = "{J. Appl. Phys.} (unpublished)", + + month = "", + year = "2010", +} + +@UNPUBLISHED{Smith2010a, + author = "V. K. Smith and K. Johnson and M. O. Klein", + title = "Surface chemistry and preferential crystal orientation on a silicon surface", + note = "{J. Appl. Phys.} (submitted)", + + month = "", + year = "2010", +} + +@UNPUBLISHED{unpublished-full, + author = "Ulrich {\"{U}}nderwood and Ned {\~N}et and Paul {\={P}}ot", + title = "Lower Bounds for Wishful Research Results", + month = nov # ", " # dec, + year = 1988, + note = "Talk at Fanstord University (A full UNPUBLISHED entry)", +} + +@MISC{JohnsonMillerSmith2007, + + author = "M. P. Johnson and K. L. Miller and K. Smith", + title = "", + howpublished = "personal communication", + month = "1~" # may, + year = "2007", + note = "", +} + +@PROCEEDINGS{Smith2007, + title = "AIP Conf. Proc.", + year = "2007", + + editor = "J. Smith", + volume = "841", + number = "21", + series = "", + address = "", + month = "", + organization = "", + publisher = "", + note = "", +} + +@PROCEEDINGS{proceedings-full, + editor = "Wizard V. Oz and Mihalis Yannakakis", + title = "Proc. Fifteenth Annual", + number = 17, + series = "All ACM Conferences", + month = mar, + year = 1983, + address = "Boston", + organization = "ACM", + publisher = "Academic Press", + note = "A full PROCEEDINGS entry", +} + +@UNPUBLISHED{Burstyn2004, + author = "Y. Burstyn", + title = "{Proceedings of the 5th International Molecular Beam Epitaxy Conference, Santa Fe, NM}", + note = "(unpublished)", + + month = "5--8~" # oct, + year = "2004", +} + +@PROCEEDINGS{Quinn2001, + title = "{Proceedings of the 2003 Particle Accelerator Conference, Portland, OR, 12-16 May 2005}", + year = "2001", + + editor = "B. Quinn", + address = "New York", + publisher = "Wiley", + note = "Albeit the conference was held in 2005, it was the 2003 conference, and the proceedings were published in 2001; go figure", +} + +@ARTICLE{Agarwal2001, + author = "A. G. Agarwal", + title = "{Proceedings of the Fifth Low Temperature Conference, Madison, WI, 1999}", + journal = "Semiconductors", + year = "2001", + + volume = "66", + pages = "1238", +} + +@ARTICLE{SmithDA01, + author = "R. Smith", + title = "Hummingbirds are our friends", + journal = {J. Appl. Phys. (these proceedings)}, + year = "2001", + volume = "", + number = "", + pages = "", + month = "", + note = "Abstract No. DA-01", +} + +@ARTICLE{Smith2007a, + author = "J. Smith", + title = "", + journal = "Proc. SPIE", + year = "2007", + + volume = "124", + pages = "367", + note = "Required title is missing", +} + +@TECHREPORT{techreport-full, + author = "Tom T{\'{e}}rrific", + title = "An {$O(n \log n / \! \log\log n)$} Sorting Algorithm", + institution = "Fanstord University", + type = "Wishful Research Result", + number = "7", + address = "Computer Science Department, Fanstord, California", + month = oct, + year = 1988, + note = "A full TECHREPORT entry", +} + +@TECHREPORT{Nelson1999, + author = "J. Nelson", + type = "{TWI Report}", + number = "666/1999", + institution = "", + year = jan # "~1999", + + note = "Required institution missing", +} + +@TECHREPORT{Fields2005, + author = "W. K. Fields", + type = "{ECE Report No.}", + number = "AL944", + institution = "", + year = "2005", + + note = "Required institution missing", +} + +@MISC{Zalkins2008, + + author = "Y. M. Zalkins", + title = "", + howpublished = "e-print arXiv:cond-mat/040426", + month = "", + year = "2008", + note = "", +} + +@MISC{Nelson2005, + + author = "J. Nelson", + howpublished = "{U.S. Patent No.} 5,693,000", + year = "12~" # dec # "~2005", +} + +@MASTERSTHESIS{Nelson1999a, + author = "J. K. Nelson", + title = "", + school = "New York University", + year = "1999", + + type = "M.{S}. thesis", + address = "", + month = "", + note = "", +} + +@MASTERSTHESIS{mastersthesis-full, + author = "{\'{E}}douard Masterly", + title = "Mastering Thesis Writing", + school = "Stanford University", + type = "Master's project", + address = "English Department", + month = jun # "-" # aug, + year = 1988, + note = "A full MASTERSTHESIS entry", +} + +@PHDTHESIS{Smith2003, + author = "S. M. Smith", + title = "", + school = "Massachusetts Institute of Technology", + year = "2003", + + type = "{Ph.D.} thesis", + address = "", + month = "", + note = "", +} + +@ARTICLE{KawaLin2003, + author = "S. R. Kawa and S.-J. Lin", + title = "", + journal = "J. Geophys. Res.", + year = "2003", + + volume = "108", + number = "D6", + pages = "4201", + month = "", + note = "{DOI:10.1029/2002JD002268}", +} + +@PHDTHESIS{phdthesis-full, + author = "F. Phidias Phony-Baloney", + title = "Fighting Fire with Fire: Festooning {F}rench Phrases", + school = "Fanstord University", + type = "{PhD} Dissertation", + address = "Department of French", + month = jun # "-" # aug, + year = 1988, + note = "A full PHDTHESIS entry", +} + +@BOOK{book-full, + author = "Donald E. Knuth", + title = "Seminumerical Algorithms", + volume = 2, + series = "The Art of Computer Programming", + publisher = "Addison-Wesley", + address = "Reading, Massachusetts", + edition = "Second", + month = "10~" # jan, + year = "\noopsort{1973c}1981", + note = "A full BOOK entry", +} + +@BOOKLET{booklet-full, + author = "Jill C. Knvth", + title = "The Programming of Computer Art", + howpublished = "Vernier Art Center", + address = "Stanford, California", + month = feb, + year = 1988, + note = "A full BOOKLET entry", +} + +@INBOOK{ballagh2000, + author = "R. Ballagh and C.M. Savage", + editor = "C.M. Savage and M. Das", + title = "Bose-Einstein condensation: from atomic physics to quantum fluids, Proceedings of the 13th Physics Summer School", + year = "2000", + publisher = "World Scientific", + address = "Singapore", + eprint = "cond-mat/0008070", +} + +@INCOLLECTION{ballagh2000a, + author = "R. Ballagh and C.M. Savage", + title = "Bose-Einstein condensation: from atomic physics to quantum fluids", + editor = "C.M. Savage and M. Das", + booktitle = "Proceedings of the 13th Physics Summer School", + year = "2000", + publisher = "World Scientific", + address = "Singapore", + eprint = "cond-mat/0008070", +} + +@inBook{Magnetism, + author = "W. Opechowski and R. Guccione", + title = "Introduction to the Theory of Normal Metals", + volume = "IIa", + pages = "105", + editor = "G. T. Rado and H. Suhl", + booktitle = "Magnetism", + publisher = "Academic Press", + address = "New York", + year = "1965", +} + +@INCOLLECTION{Magnetisma, + author = "W. Opechowski and R. Guccione", + title = "Introduction to the Theory of Normal Metals", + editor = "G. T. Rado and H. Suhl", + booktitle = "Magnetism", + volume = "IIa", + pages = "105", + publisher = "Academic Press", + address = "New York", + year = "1965", +} + +@INPROCEEDINGS{Magnetismb, + author = "W. Opechowski and R. Guccione", + title = "Introduction to the Theory of Normal Metals", + editor = "G. T. Rado and H. Suhl", + booktitle = "Magnetism", + volume = "IIa", + pages = "105", + publisher = "Academic Press", + address = "New York", + year = "1965", +} + +@INBOOK{Smith80, + author = "J. M. Smith", + title = "Molecular Dynamics", + publisher = "Academic", + year = "1980", + address = "New York", + editor = "C. Brown", +} + +@article{ZS71, + author = "V. E. Zakharov and A. B. Shabat", + title = "Exact theory of two-dimensional self-focusing and one-dimensional self-modulation of waves in nonlinear media", + journal = "Zh. Eksp. Teor. Fiz.", + volume = "61", + year = "1971", + pages = "118--134", + translation = "Sov. Phys. JETP \textbf{34}, 62 (1972)" +} + +@INCOLLECTION{Smith80a, + author = "J. M. Smith", + booktitle = "Molecular Dynamics", + editor = "C. Brown", + publisher = "Academic", + year = "1980", + address = "New York", +} + +@INCOLLECTION{incollection-full, + author = "Daniel D. Lincoll", + title = "Semigroups of Recurrences", + editor = "David J. Lipcoll and D. H. Lawrie and A. H. Sameh", + booktitle = "High Speed Computer and Algorithm Organization", + number = 23, + series = "Fast Computers", + chapter = 3, + type = "Part", + pages = "179--183", + publisher = "Academic Press", + address = "New York", + edition = "Third", + month = sep, + year = 1977, + note = "A full INCOLLECTION entry", +} + +@INPROCEEDINGS{inproceedings-full, + author = "Alfred V. Oaho and Jeffrey D. Ullman and Mihalis Yannakakis", + title = "On Notions of Information Transfer in {VLSI} Circuits", + editor = "Wizard V. Oz and Mihalis Yannakakis", + booktitle = "Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM", + bookaddress = "Boston, 1982", + number = 17, + series = "All ACM Conferences", + pages = "133--139", + month = mar, + year = 1983, + address = "New York", + organization = "ACM", + publisher = "Academic Press", + note = "A full INPROCEDINGS entry", +} + +@MANUAL{manual-full, + author = "Larry Manmaker", + title = "The Definitive Computer Manual", + organization = "Chips-R-Us", + address = "Silicon Valley", + edition = "Silver", + month = apr # "-" # may, + year = 1986, + note = "A full MANUAL entry", +} diff --git a/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/apssamp.pdf b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/apssamp.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..3e11f39 --- /dev/null +++ b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/apssamp.pdf diff --git a/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/apssamp.tex b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/apssamp.tex new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ae2eb52 --- /dev/null +++ b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/apssamp.tex @@ -0,0 +1,753 @@ +% ****** Start of file apssamp.tex ****** +% +% This file is part of the APS files in the REVTeX 4.2 distribution. +% Version 4.2a of REVTeX, December 2014 +% +% Copyright (c) 2014 The American Physical Society. +% +% See the REVTeX 4 README file for restrictions and more information. +% +% TeX'ing this file requires that you have AMS-LaTeX 2.0 installed +% as well as the rest of the prerequisites for REVTeX 4.2 +% +% See the REVTeX 4 README file +% It also requires running BibTeX. The commands are as follows: +% +% 1) latex apssamp.tex +% 2) bibtex apssamp +% 3) latex apssamp.tex +% 4) latex apssamp.tex +% +\documentclass[% + reprint, +%superscriptaddress, +%groupedaddress, +%unsortedaddress, +%runinaddress, +%frontmatterverbose, +%preprint, +%preprintnumbers, +%nofootinbib, +%nobibnotes, +%bibnotes, + amsmath,amssymb, + aps, +%pra, +%prb, +%rmp, +%prstab, +%prstper, +%floatfix, +]{revtex4-2} + +\usepackage{graphicx}% Include figure files +\usepackage{dcolumn}% Align table columns on decimal point +\usepackage{bm}% bold math +%\usepackage{hyperref}% add hypertext capabilities +%\usepackage[mathlines]{lineno}% Enable numbering of text and display math +%\linenumbers\relax % Commence numbering lines + +%\usepackage[showframe,%Uncomment any one of the following lines to test +%%scale=0.7, marginratio={1:1, 2:3}, ignoreall,% default settings +%%text={7in,10in},centering, +%%margin=1.5in, +%%total={6.5in,8.75in}, top=1.2in, left=0.9in, includefoot, +%%height=10in,a5paper,hmargin={3cm,0.8in}, +%]{geometry} + +\begin{document} + +\preprint{APS/123-QED} + +\title{Manuscript Title:\\with Forced Linebreak}% Force line breaks with \\ +\thanks{A footnote to the article title}% + +\author{Ann Author} + \altaffiliation[Also at ]{Physics Department, XYZ University.}%Lines break automatically or can be forced with \\ +\author{Second Author}% + \email{Second.Author@institution.edu} +\affiliation{% + Authors' institution and/or address\\ + This line break forced with \textbackslash\textbackslash +}% + +\collaboration{MUSO Collaboration}%\noaffiliation + +\author{Charlie Author} + \homepage{http://www.Second.institution.edu/~Charlie.Author} +\affiliation{ + Second institution and/or address\\ + This line break forced% with \\ +}% +\affiliation{ + Third institution, the second for Charlie Author +}% +\author{Delta Author} +\affiliation{% + Authors' institution and/or address\\ + This line break forced with \textbackslash\textbackslash +}% + +\collaboration{CLEO Collaboration}%\noaffiliation + +\date{\today}% It is always \today, today, + % but any date may be explicitly specified + +\begin{abstract} +An article usually includes an abstract, a concise summary of the work +covered at length in the main body of the article. +\begin{description} +\item[Usage] +Secondary publications and information retrieval purposes. +\item[Structure] +You may use the \texttt{description} environment to structure your abstract; +use the optional argument of the \verb+\item+ command to give the category of each item. +\end{description} +\end{abstract} + +%\keywords{Suggested keywords}%Use showkeys class option if keyword + %display desired +\maketitle + +%\tableofcontents + +\section{\label{sec:level1}First-level heading:\protect\\ The line +break was forced \lowercase{via} \textbackslash\textbackslash} + +This sample document demonstrates proper use of REV\TeX~4.2 (and +\LaTeXe) in mansucripts prepared for submission to APS +journals. Further information can be found in the REV\TeX~4.2 +documentation included in the distribution or available at +\url{http://journals.aps.org/revtex/}. + +When commands are referred to in this example file, they are always +shown with their required arguments, using normal \TeX{} format. In +this format, \verb+#1+, \verb+#2+, etc. stand for required +author-supplied arguments to commands. For example, in +\verb+\section{#1}+ the \verb+#1+ stands for the title text of the +author's section heading, and in \verb+\title{#1}+ the \verb+#1+ +stands for the title text of the paper. + +Line breaks in section headings at all levels can be introduced using +\textbackslash\textbackslash. A blank input line tells \TeX\ that the +paragraph has ended. Note that top-level section headings are +automatically uppercased. If a specific letter or word should appear in +lowercase instead, you must escape it using \verb+\lowercase{#1}+ as +in the word ``via'' above. + +\subsection{\label{sec:level2}Second-level heading: Formatting} + +This file may be formatted in either the \texttt{preprint} or +\texttt{reprint} style. \texttt{reprint} format mimics final journal output. +Either format may be used for submission purposes. \texttt{letter} sized paper should +be used when submitting to APS journals. + +\subsubsection{Wide text (A level-3 head)} +The \texttt{widetext} environment will make the text the width of the +full page, as on page~\pageref{eq:wideeq}. (Note the use the +\verb+\pageref{#1}+ command to refer to the page number.) +\paragraph{Note (Fourth-level head is run in)} +The width-changing commands only take effect in two-column formatting. +There is no effect if text is in a single column. + +\subsection{\label{sec:citeref}Citations and References} +A citation in text uses the command \verb+\cite{#1}+ or +\verb+\onlinecite{#1}+ and refers to an entry in the bibliography. +An entry in the bibliography is a reference to another document. + +\subsubsection{Citations} +Because REV\TeX\ uses the \verb+natbib+ package of Patrick Daly, +the entire repertoire of commands in that package are available for your document; +see the \verb+natbib+ documentation for further details. Please note that +REV\TeX\ requires version 8.31a or later of \verb+natbib+. + +\paragraph{Syntax} +The argument of \verb+\cite+ may be a single \emph{key}, +or may consist of a comma-separated list of keys. +The citation \emph{key} may contain +letters, numbers, the dash (-) character, or the period (.) character. +New with natbib 8.3 is an extension to the syntax that allows for +a star (*) form and two optional arguments on the citation key itself. +The syntax of the \verb+\cite+ command is thus (informally stated) +\begin{quotation}\flushleft\leftskip1em +\verb+\cite+ \verb+{+ \emph{key} \verb+}+, or\\ +\verb+\cite+ \verb+{+ \emph{optarg+key} \verb+}+, or\\ +\verb+\cite+ \verb+{+ \emph{optarg+key} \verb+,+ \emph{optarg+key}\ldots \verb+}+, +\end{quotation}\noindent +where \emph{optarg+key} signifies +\begin{quotation}\flushleft\leftskip1em +\emph{key}, or\\ +\texttt{*}\emph{key}, or\\ +\texttt{[}\emph{pre}\texttt{]}\emph{key}, or\\ +\texttt{[}\emph{pre}\texttt{]}\texttt{[}\emph{post}\texttt{]}\emph{key}, or even\\ +\texttt{*}\texttt{[}\emph{pre}\texttt{]}\texttt{[}\emph{post}\texttt{]}\emph{key}. +\end{quotation}\noindent +where \emph{pre} and \emph{post} is whatever text you wish to place +at the beginning and end, respectively, of the bibliographic reference +(see Ref.~[\onlinecite{witten2001}] and the two under Ref.~[\onlinecite{feyn54}]). +(Keep in mind that no automatic space or punctuation is applied.) +It is highly recommended that you put the entire \emph{pre} or \emph{post} portion +within its own set of braces, for example: +\verb+\cite+ \verb+{+ \texttt{[} \verb+{+\emph{text}\verb+}+\texttt{]}\emph{key}\verb+}+. +The extra set of braces will keep \LaTeX\ out of trouble if your \emph{text} contains the comma (,) character. + +The star (*) modifier to the \emph{key} signifies that the reference is to be +merged with the previous reference into a single bibliographic entry, +a common idiom in APS and AIP articles (see below, Ref.~[\onlinecite{epr}]). +When references are merged in this way, they are separated by a semicolon instead of +the period (full stop) that would otherwise appear. + +\paragraph{Eliding repeated information} +When a reference is merged, some of its fields may be elided: for example, +when the author matches that of the previous reference, it is omitted. +If both author and journal match, both are omitted. +If the journal matches, but the author does not, the journal is replaced by \emph{ibid.}, +as exemplified by Ref.~[\onlinecite{epr}]. +These rules embody common editorial practice in APS and AIP journals and will only +be in effect if the markup features of the APS and AIP Bib\TeX\ styles is employed. + +\paragraph{The options of the cite command itself} +Please note that optional arguments to the \emph{key} change the reference in the bibliography, +not the citation in the body of the document. +For the latter, use the optional arguments of the \verb+\cite+ command itself: +\verb+\cite+ \texttt{*}\allowbreak +\texttt{[}\emph{pre-cite}\texttt{]}\allowbreak +\texttt{[}\emph{post-cite}\texttt{]}\allowbreak +\verb+{+\emph{key-list}\verb+}+. + +\subsubsection{Example citations} +By default, citations are numerical\cite{Beutler1994}. +Author-year citations are used when the journal is RMP. +To give a textual citation, use \verb+\onlinecite{#1}+: +Refs.~\onlinecite{[][{, and references therein}]witten2001,Bire82}. +By default, the \texttt{natbib} package automatically sorts your citations into numerical order and ``compresses'' runs of three or more consecutive numerical citations. +REV\TeX\ provides the ability to automatically change the punctuation when switching between journal styles that provide citations in square brackets and those that use a superscript style instead. This is done through the \texttt{citeautoscript} option. For instance, the journal style \texttt{prb} automatically invokes this option because \textit{Physical +Review B} uses superscript-style citations. The effect is to move the punctuation, which normally comes after a citation in square brackets, to its proper position before the superscript. +To illustrate, we cite several together +\cite{[See the explanation of time travel in ]feyn54,*[The classical relativistic treatment of ][ is a relative classic]epr,witten2001,Berman1983,Davies1998,Bire82}, +and once again in different order (Refs.~\cite{epr,feyn54,Bire82,Berman1983,witten2001,Davies1998}). +Note that the citations were both compressed and sorted. Futhermore, running this sample file under the \texttt{prb} option will move the punctuation to the correct place. + +When the \verb+prb+ class option is used, the \verb+\cite{#1}+ command +displays the reference's number as a superscript rather than in +square brackets. Note that the location of the \verb+\cite{#1}+ +command should be adjusted for the reference style: the superscript +references in \verb+prb+ style must appear after punctuation; +otherwise the reference must appear before any punctuation. This +sample was written for the regular (non-\texttt{prb}) citation style. +The command \verb+\onlinecite{#1}+ in the \texttt{prb} style also +displays the reference on the baseline. + +\subsubsection{References} +A reference in the bibliography is specified by a \verb+\bibitem{#1}+ command +with the same argument as the \verb+\cite{#1}+ command. +\verb+\bibitem{#1}+ commands may be crafted by hand or, preferably, +generated by Bib\TeX. +REV\TeX~4.2 includes Bib\TeX\ style files +\verb+apsrev4-2.bst+, \verb+apsrmp4-2.bst+ appropriate for +\textit{Physical Review} and \textit{Reviews of Modern Physics}, +respectively. + +\subsubsection{Example references} +This sample file employs the \verb+\bibliography+ command, +which formats the \texttt{\jobname .bbl} file +and specifies which bibliographic databases are to be used by Bib\TeX\ +(one of these should be by arXiv convention \texttt{\jobname .bib}). +Running Bib\TeX\ (via \texttt{bibtex \jobname}) +after the first pass of \LaTeX\ produces the file +\texttt{\jobname .bbl} which contains the automatically formatted +\verb+\bibitem+ commands (including extra markup information via +\verb+\bibinfo+ and \verb+\bibfield+ commands). +If not using Bib\TeX, you will have to create the \verb+thebibiliography+ environment +and its \verb+\bibitem+ commands by hand. + +Numerous examples of the use of the APS bibliographic entry types appear in the bibliography of this sample document. +You can refer to the \texttt{\jobname .bib} file, +and compare its information to the formatted bibliography itself. + +\subsection{Footnotes}% +Footnotes, produced using the \verb+\footnote{#1}+ command, +usually integrated into the bibliography alongside the other entries. +Numerical citation styles do this% +\footnote{Automatically placing footnotes into the bibliography requires using BibTeX to compile the bibliography.}; +author-year citation styles place the footnote at the bottom of the text column. +Note: due to the method used to place footnotes in the bibliography, +\emph{you must re-run Bib\TeX\ every time you change any of your document's footnotes}. + +\section{Math and Equations} +Inline math may be typeset using the \verb+$+ delimiters. Bold math +symbols may be achieved using the \verb+bm+ package and the +\verb+\bm{#1}+ command it supplies. For instance, a bold $\alpha$ can +be typeset as \verb+$\bm{\alpha}$+ giving $\bm{\alpha}$. Fraktur and +Blackboard (or open face or double struck) characters should be +typeset using the \verb+\mathfrak{#1}+ and \verb+\mathbb{#1}+ commands +respectively. Both are supplied by the \texttt{amssymb} package. For +example, \verb+$\mathbb{R}$+ gives $\mathbb{R}$ and +\verb+$\mathfrak{G}$+ gives $\mathfrak{G}$ + +In \LaTeX\ there are many different ways to display equations, and a +few preferred ways are noted below. Displayed math will center by +default. Use the class option \verb+fleqn+ to flush equations left. + +Below we have numbered single-line equations; this is the most common +type of equation in \textit{Physical Review}: +\begin{eqnarray} +\chi_+(p)\alt{\bf [}2|{\bf p}|(|{\bf p}|+p_z){\bf ]}^{-1/2} +\left( +\begin{array}{c} +|{\bf p}|+p_z\\ +px+ip_y +\end{array}\right)\;, +\\ +\left\{% + \openone234567890abc123\alpha\beta\gamma\delta1234556\alpha\beta + \frac{1\sum^{a}_{b}}{A^2}% +\right\}% +\label{eq:one}. +\end{eqnarray} +Note the open one in Eq.~(\ref{eq:one}). + +Not all numbered equations will fit within a narrow column this +way. The equation number will move down automatically if it cannot fit +on the same line with a one-line equation: +\begin{equation} +\left\{ + ab12345678abc123456abcdef\alpha\beta\gamma\delta1234556\alpha\beta + \frac{1\sum^{a}_{b}}{A^2}% +\right\}. +\end{equation} + +When the \verb+\label{#1}+ command is used [cf. input for +Eq.~(\ref{eq:one})], the equation can be referred to in text without +knowing the equation number that \TeX\ will assign to it. Just +use \verb+\ref{#1}+, where \verb+#1+ is the same name that used in +the \verb+\label{#1}+ command. + +Unnumbered single-line equations can be typeset +using the \verb+\[+, \verb+\]+ format: +\[g^+g^+ \rightarrow g^+g^+g^+g^+ \dots ~,~~q^+q^+\rightarrow +q^+g^+g^+ \dots ~. \] + + +\subsection{Multiline equations} + +Multiline equations are obtained by using the \verb+eqnarray+ +environment. Use the \verb+\nonumber+ command at the end of each line +to avoid assigning a number: +\begin{eqnarray} +{\cal M}=&&ig_Z^2(4E_1E_2)^{1/2}(l_i^2)^{-1} +\delta_{\sigma_1,-\sigma_2} +(g_{\sigma_2}^e)^2\chi_{-\sigma_2}(p_2)\nonumber\\ +&&\times +[\epsilon_jl_i\epsilon_i]_{\sigma_1}\chi_{\sigma_1}(p_1), +\end{eqnarray} +\begin{eqnarray} +\sum \vert M^{\text{viol}}_g \vert ^2&=&g^{2n-4}_S(Q^2)~N^{n-2} + (N^2-1)\nonumber \\ + & &\times \left( \sum_{i<j}\right) + \sum_{\text{perm}} + \frac{1}{S_{12}} + \frac{1}{S_{12}} + \sum_\tau c^f_\tau~. +\end{eqnarray} +\textbf{Note:} Do not use \verb+\label{#1}+ on a line of a multiline +equation if \verb+\nonumber+ is also used on that line. Incorrect +cross-referencing will result. Notice the use \verb+\text{#1}+ for +using a Roman font within a math environment. + +To set a multiline equation without \emph{any} equation +numbers, use the \verb+\begin{eqnarray*}+, +\verb+\end{eqnarray*}+ format: +\begin{eqnarray*} +\sum \vert M^{\text{viol}}_g \vert ^2&=&g^{2n-4}_S(Q^2)~N^{n-2} + (N^2-1)\\ + & &\times \left( \sum_{i<j}\right) + \left( + \sum_{\text{perm}}\frac{1}{S_{12}S_{23}S_{n1}} + \right) + \frac{1}{S_{12}}~. +\end{eqnarray*} + +To obtain numbers not normally produced by the automatic numbering, +use the \verb+\tag{#1}+ command, where \verb+#1+ is the desired +equation number. For example, to get an equation number of +(\ref{eq:mynum}), +\begin{equation} +g^+g^+ \rightarrow g^+g^+g^+g^+ \dots ~,~~q^+q^+\rightarrow +q^+g^+g^+ \dots ~. \tag{2.6$'$}\label{eq:mynum} +\end{equation} + +\paragraph{A few notes on \texttt{tag}s} +\verb+\tag{#1}+ requires the \texttt{amsmath} package. +Place the \verb+\tag{#1}+ command before the \verb+\label{#1}+, if any. +The numbering produced by \verb+\tag{#1}+ \textit{does not affect} +the automatic numbering in REV\TeX; +therefore, the number must be known ahead of time, +and it must be manually adjusted if other equations are added. +\verb+\tag{#1}+ works with both single-line and multiline equations. +\verb+\tag{#1}+ should only be used in exceptional cases---% +do not use it to number many equations in your paper. +Please note that this feature of the \texttt{amsmath} package +is \emph{not} compatible with the \texttt{hyperref} (6.77u) package. + +Enclosing display math within +\verb+\begin{subequations}+ and \verb+\end{subequations}+ will produce +a set of equations that are labeled with letters, as shown in +Eqs.~(\ref{subeq:1}) and (\ref{subeq:2}) below. +You may include any number of single-line and multiline equations, +although it is probably not a good idea to follow one display math +directly after another. +\begin{subequations} +\label{eq:whole} +\begin{eqnarray} +{\cal M}=&&ig_Z^2(4E_1E_2)^{1/2}(l_i^2)^{-1} +(g_{\sigma_2}^e)^2\chi_{-\sigma_2}(p_2)\nonumber\\ +&&\times +[\epsilon_i]_{\sigma_1}\chi_{\sigma_1}(p_1).\label{subeq:2} +\end{eqnarray} +\begin{equation} +\left\{ + abc123456abcdef\alpha\beta\gamma\delta1234556\alpha\beta + \frac{1\sum^{a}_{b}}{A^2} +\right\},\label{subeq:1} +\end{equation} +\end{subequations} +Giving a \verb+\label{#1}+ command directly after the \verb+\begin{subequations}+, +allows you to reference all the equations in the \texttt{subequations} environment. +For example, the equations in the preceding subequations environment were +Eqs.~(\ref{eq:whole}). + +\subsubsection{Wide equations} +The equation that follows is set in a wide format, i.e., it spans the full page. +The wide format is reserved for long equations +that cannot easily be set in a single column: +\begin{widetext} +\begin{equation} +{\cal R}^{(\text{d})}= + g_{\sigma_2}^e + \left( + \frac{[\Gamma^Z(3,21)]_{\sigma_1}}{Q_{12}^2-M_W^2} + +\frac{[\Gamma^Z(13,2)]_{\sigma_1}}{Q_{13}^2-M_W^2} + \right) + + x_WQ_e + \left( + \frac{[\Gamma^\gamma(3,21)]_{\sigma_1}}{Q_{12}^2-M_W^2} + +\frac{[\Gamma^\gamma(13,2)]_{\sigma_1}}{Q_{13}^2-M_W^2} + \right)\;. + \label{eq:wideeq} +\end{equation} +\end{widetext} +This is typed to show how the output appears in wide format. +(Incidentally, since there is no blank line between the \texttt{equation} environment above +and the start of this paragraph, this paragraph is not indented.) + +\section{Cross-referencing} +REV\TeX{} will automatically number such things as +sections, footnotes, equations, figure captions, and table captions. +In order to reference them in text, use the +\verb+\label{#1}+ and \verb+\ref{#1}+ commands. +To reference a particular page, use the \verb+\pageref{#1}+ command. + +The \verb+\label{#1}+ should appear +within the section heading, +within the footnote text, +within the equation, or +within the table or figure caption. +The \verb+\ref{#1}+ command +is used in text at the point where the reference is to be displayed. +Some examples: Section~\ref{sec:level1} on page~\pageref{sec:level1}, +Table~\ref{tab:table1},% +\begin{table}[b]%The best place to locate the table environment is directly after its first reference in text +\caption{\label{tab:table1}% +A table that fits into a single column of a two-column layout. +Note that REV\TeX~4 adjusts the intercolumn spacing so that the table fills the +entire width of the column. Table captions are numbered +automatically. +This table illustrates left-, center-, decimal- and right-aligned columns, +along with the use of the \texttt{ruledtabular} environment which sets the +Scotch (double) rules above and below the alignment, per APS style. +} +\begin{ruledtabular} +\begin{tabular}{lcdr} +\textrm{Left\footnote{Note a.}}& +\textrm{Centered\footnote{Note b.}}& +\multicolumn{1}{c}{\textrm{Decimal}}& +\textrm{Right}\\ +\colrule +1 & 2 & 3.001 & 4\\ +10 & 20 & 30 & 40\\ +100 & 200 & 300.0 & 400\\ +\end{tabular} +\end{ruledtabular} +\end{table} +and Fig.~\ref{fig:epsart}.% +\begin{figure}[b] +\includegraphics{fig_1}% Here is how to import EPS art +\caption{\label{fig:epsart} A figure caption. The figure captions are +automatically numbered.} +\end{figure} + +\section{Floats: Figures, Tables, Videos, etc.} +Figures and tables are usually allowed to ``float'', which means that their +placement is determined by \LaTeX, while the document is being typeset. + +Use the \texttt{figure} environment for a figure, the \texttt{table} environment for a table. +In each case, use the \verb+\caption+ command within to give the text of the +figure or table caption along with the \verb+\label+ command to provide +a key for referring to this figure or table. +The typical content of a figure is an image of some kind; +that of a table is an alignment.% +\begin{figure*} +\includegraphics{fig_2}% Here is how to import EPS art +\caption{\label{fig:wide}Use the figure* environment to get a wide +figure that spans the page in \texttt{twocolumn} formatting.} +\end{figure*} +\begin{table*} +\caption{\label{tab:table3}This is a wide table that spans the full page +width in a two-column layout. It is formatted using the +\texttt{table*} environment. It also demonstates the use of +\textbackslash\texttt{multicolumn} in rows with entries that span +more than one column.} +\begin{ruledtabular} +\begin{tabular}{ccccc} + &\multicolumn{2}{c}{$D_{4h}^1$}&\multicolumn{2}{c}{$D_{4h}^5$}\\ + Ion&1st alternative&2nd alternative&lst alternative +&2nd alternative\\ \hline + K&$(2e)+(2f)$&$(4i)$ &$(2c)+(2d)$&$(4f)$ \\ + Mn&$(2g)$\footnote{The $z$ parameter of these positions is $z\sim\frac{1}{4}$.} + &$(a)+(b)+(c)+(d)$&$(4e)$&$(2a)+(2b)$\\ + Cl&$(a)+(b)+(c)+(d)$&$(2g)$\footnotemark[1] + &$(4e)^{\text{a}}$\\ + He&$(8r)^{\text{a}}$&$(4j)^{\text{a}}$&$(4g)^{\text{a}}$\\ + Ag& &$(4k)^{\text{a}}$& &$(4h)^{\text{a}}$\\ +\end{tabular} +\end{ruledtabular} +\end{table*} + +Insert an image using either the \texttt{graphics} or +\texttt{graphix} packages, which define the \verb+\includegraphics{#1}+ command. +(The two packages differ in respect of the optional arguments +used to specify the orientation, scaling, and translation of the image.) +To create an alignment, use the \texttt{tabular} environment. + +The best place to locate the \texttt{figure} or \texttt{table} environment +is immediately following its first reference in text; this sample document +illustrates this practice for Fig.~\ref{fig:epsart}, which +shows a figure that is small enough to fit in a single column. + +In exceptional cases, you will need to move the float earlier in the document, as was done +with Table~\ref{tab:table3}: \LaTeX's float placement algorithms need to know +about a full-page-width float earlier. + +Fig.~\ref{fig:wide} +has content that is too wide for a single column, +so the \texttt{figure*} environment has been used.% +\begin{table}[b] +\caption{\label{tab:table4}% +Numbers in columns Three--Five are aligned with the ``d'' column specifier +(requires the \texttt{dcolumn} package). +Non-numeric entries (those entries without a ``.'') in a ``d'' column are aligned on the decimal point. +Use the ``D'' specifier for more complex layouts. } +\begin{ruledtabular} +\begin{tabular}{ccddd} +One&Two& +\multicolumn{1}{c}{\textrm{Three}}& +\multicolumn{1}{c}{\textrm{Four}}& +\multicolumn{1}{c}{\textrm{Five}}\\ +%\mbox{Three}&\mbox{Four}&\mbox{Five}\\ +\hline +one&two&\mbox{three}&\mbox{four}&\mbox{five}\\ +He&2& 2.77234 & 45672. & 0.69 \\ +C\footnote{Some tables require footnotes.} + &C\footnote{Some tables need more than one footnote.} + & 12537.64 & 37.66345 & 86.37 \\ +\end{tabular} +\end{ruledtabular} +\end{table} + +The content of a table is typically a \texttt{tabular} environment, +giving rows of type in aligned columns. +Column entries separated by \verb+&+'s, and +each row ends with \textbackslash\textbackslash. +The required argument for the \texttt{tabular} environment +specifies how data are aligned in the columns. +For instance, entries may be centered, left-justified, right-justified, aligned on a decimal +point. +Extra column-spacing may be be specified as well, +although REV\TeX~4 sets this spacing so that the columns fill the width of the +table. Horizontal rules are typeset using the \verb+\hline+ +command. The doubled (or Scotch) rules that appear at the top and +bottom of a table can be achieved enclosing the \texttt{tabular} +environment within a \texttt{ruledtabular} environment. Rows whose +columns span multiple columns can be typeset using the +\verb+\multicolumn{#1}{#2}{#3}+ command (for example, see the first +row of Table~\ref{tab:table3}).% + +Tables~\ref{tab:table1}, \ref{tab:table3}, \ref{tab:table4}, and \ref{tab:table2}% +\begin{table}[b] +\caption{\label{tab:table2} +A table with numerous columns that still fits into a single column. +Here, several entries share the same footnote. +Inspect the \LaTeX\ input for this table to see exactly how it is done.} +\begin{ruledtabular} +\begin{tabular}{cccccccc} + &$r_c$ (\AA)&$r_0$ (\AA)&$\kappa r_0$& + &$r_c$ (\AA) &$r_0$ (\AA)&$\kappa r_0$\\ +\hline +Cu& 0.800 & 14.10 & 2.550 &Sn\footnotemark[1] +& 0.680 & 1.870 & 3.700 \\ +Ag& 0.990 & 15.90 & 2.710 &Pb\footnotemark[2] +& 0.450 & 1.930 & 3.760 \\ +Au& 1.150 & 15.90 & 2.710 &Ca\footnotemark[3] +& 0.750 & 2.170 & 3.560 \\ +Mg& 0.490 & 17.60 & 3.200 &Sr\footnotemark[4] +& 0.900 & 2.370 & 3.720 \\ +Zn& 0.300 & 15.20 & 2.970 &Li\footnotemark[2] +& 0.380 & 1.730 & 2.830 \\ +Cd& 0.530 & 17.10 & 3.160 &Na\footnotemark[5] +& 0.760 & 2.110 & 3.120 \\ +Hg& 0.550 & 17.80 & 3.220 &K\footnotemark[5] +& 1.120 & 2.620 & 3.480 \\ +Al& 0.230 & 15.80 & 3.240 &Rb\footnotemark[3] +& 1.330 & 2.800 & 3.590 \\ +Ga& 0.310 & 16.70 & 3.330 &Cs\footnotemark[4] +& 1.420 & 3.030 & 3.740 \\ +In& 0.460 & 18.40 & 3.500 &Ba\footnotemark[5] +& 0.960 & 2.460 & 3.780 \\ +Tl& 0.480 & 18.90 & 3.550 & & & & \\ +\end{tabular} +\end{ruledtabular} +\footnotetext[1]{Here's the first, from Ref.~\onlinecite{feyn54}.} +\footnotetext[2]{Here's the second.} +\footnotetext[3]{Here's the third.} +\footnotetext[4]{Here's the fourth.} +\footnotetext[5]{And etc.} +\end{table} +show various effects. +A table that fits in a single column employs the \texttt{table} +environment. +Table~\ref{tab:table3} is a wide table, set with the \texttt{table*} environment. +Long tables may need to break across pages. +The most straightforward way to accomplish this is to specify +the \verb+[H]+ float placement on the \texttt{table} or +\texttt{table*} environment. +However, the \LaTeXe\ package \texttt{longtable} allows headers and footers to be specified for each page of the table. +A simple example of the use of \texttt{longtable} can be found +in the file \texttt{summary.tex} that is included with the REV\TeX~4 +distribution. + +There are two methods for setting footnotes within a table (these +footnotes will be displayed directly below the table rather than at +the bottom of the page or in the bibliography). The easiest +and preferred method is just to use the \verb+\footnote{#1}+ +command. This will automatically enumerate the footnotes with +lowercase roman letters. However, it is sometimes necessary to have +multiple entries in the table share the same footnote. In this case, +there is no choice but to manually create the footnotes using +\verb+\footnotemark[#1]+ and \verb+\footnotetext[#1]{#2}+. +\texttt{\#1} is a numeric value. Each time the same value for +\texttt{\#1} is used, the same mark is produced in the table. The +\verb+\footnotetext[#1]{#2}+ commands are placed after the \texttt{tabular} +environment. Examine the \LaTeX\ source and output for +Tables~\ref{tab:table1} and \ref{tab:table2} +for examples. + +Video~\ref{vid:PRSTPER.4.010101} +illustrates several features new with REV\TeX4.2, +starting with the \texttt{video} environment, which is in the same category with +\texttt{figure} and \texttt{table}.% +\begin{video} +\href{http://prst-per.aps.org/multimedia/PRSTPER/v4/i1/e010101/e010101_vid1a.mpg}{\includegraphics{vid_1a}}% + \quad +\href{http://prst-per.aps.org/multimedia/PRSTPER/v4/i1/e010101/e010101_vid1b.mpg}{\includegraphics{vid_1b}} + \setfloatlink{http://link.aps.org/multimedia/PRSTPER/v4/i1/e010101}% + \caption{\label{vid:PRSTPER.4.010101}% + Students explain their initial idea about Newton's third law to a teaching assistant. + Clip (a): same force. + Clip (b): move backwards. + }% +\end{video} +The \verb+\setfloatlink+ command causes the title of the video to be a hyperlink to the +indicated URL; it may be used with any environment that takes the \verb+\caption+ +command. +The \verb+\href+ command has the same significance as it does in the context of +the \texttt{hyperref} package: the second argument is a piece of text to be +typeset in your document; the first is its hyperlink, a URL. + +\textit{Physical Review} style requires that the initial citation of +figures or tables be in numerical order in text, so don't cite +Fig.~\ref{fig:wide} until Fig.~\ref{fig:epsart} has been cited. + +\begin{acknowledgments} +We wish to acknowledge the support of the author community in using +REV\TeX{}, offering suggestions and encouragement, testing new versions, +\dots. +\end{acknowledgments} + +\appendix + +\section{Appendixes} + +To start the appendixes, use the \verb+\appendix+ command. +This signals that all following section commands refer to appendixes +instead of regular sections. Therefore, the \verb+\appendix+ command +should be used only once---to setup the section commands to act as +appendixes. Thereafter normal section commands are used. The heading +for a section can be left empty. For example, +\begin{verbatim} +\appendix +\section{} +\end{verbatim} +will produce an appendix heading that says ``APPENDIX A'' and +\begin{verbatim} +\appendix +\section{Background} +\end{verbatim} +will produce an appendix heading that says ``APPENDIX A: BACKGROUND'' +(note that the colon is set automatically). + +If there is only one appendix, then the letter ``A'' should not +appear. This is suppressed by using the star version of the appendix +command (\verb+\appendix*+ in the place of \verb+\appendix+). + +\section{A little more on appendixes} + +Observe that this appendix was started by using +\begin{verbatim} +\section{A little more on appendixes} +\end{verbatim} + +Note the equation number in an appendix: +\begin{equation} +E=mc^2. +\end{equation} + +\subsection{\label{app:subsec}A subsection in an appendix} + +You can use a subsection or subsubsection in an appendix. Note the +numbering: we are now in Appendix~\ref{app:subsec}. + +Note the equation numbers in this appendix, produced with the +subequations environment: +\begin{subequations} +\begin{eqnarray} +E&=&mc, \label{appa} +\\ +E&=&mc^2, \label{appb} +\\ +E&\agt& mc^3. \label{appc} +\end{eqnarray} +\end{subequations} +They turn out to be Eqs.~(\ref{appa}), (\ref{appb}), and (\ref{appc}). + +% The \nocite command causes all entries in a bibliography to be printed out +% whether or not they are actually referenced in the text. This is appropriate +% for the sample file to show the different styles of references, but authors +% most likely will not want to use it. +\nocite{*} + +\bibliography{apssamp}% Produces the bibliography via BibTeX. + +\end{document} +% +% ****** End of file apssamp.tex ****** diff --git a/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/apstemplate.tex b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/apstemplate.tex new file mode 100644 index 0000000..84d3435 --- /dev/null +++ b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/apstemplate.tex @@ -0,0 +1,173 @@ +%% ****** Start of file apstemplate.tex ****** % +%% +%% +%% This file is part of the APS files in the REVTeX 4.2 distribution. +%% Version 4.2a of REVTeX, January, 2015 +%% +%% +%% Copyright (c) 2015 The American Physical Society. +%% +%% See the REVTeX 4 README file for restrictions and more information. +%% +% +% This is a template for producing manuscripts for use with REVTEX 4.2 +% Copy this file to another name and then work on that file. +% That way, you always have this original template file to use. +% +% Group addresses by affiliation; use superscriptaddress for long +% author lists, or if there are many overlapping affiliations. +% For Phys. Rev. appearance, change preprint to twocolumn. +% Choose pra, prb, prc, prd, pre, prl, prstab, prstper, or rmp for journal +% Add 'draft' option to mark overfull boxes with black boxes +% Add 'showkeys' option to make keywords appear +\documentclass[aps,prl,preprint,groupedaddress]{revtex4-2} +%\documentclass[aps,prl,preprint,superscriptaddress]{revtex4-2} +%\documentclass[aps,prl,reprint,groupedaddress]{revtex4-2} + +% You should use BibTeX and apsrev.bst for references +% Choosing a journal automatically selects the correct APS +% BibTeX style file (bst file), so only uncomment the line +% below if necessary. +%\bibliographystyle{apsrev4-2} + +\begin{document} + +% Use the \preprint command to place your local institutional report +% number in the upper righthand corner of the title page in preprint mode. +% Multiple \preprint commands are allowed. +% Use the 'preprintnumbers' class option to override journal defaults +% to display numbers if necessary +%\preprint{} + +%Title of paper +\title{} + +% repeat the \author .. \affiliation etc. as needed +% \email, \thanks, \homepage, \altaffiliation all apply to the current +% author. Explanatory text should go in the []'s, actual e-mail +% address or url should go in the {}'s for \email and \homepage. +% Please use the appropriate macro foreach each type of information + +% \affiliation command applies to all authors since the last +% \affiliation command. The \affiliation command should follow the +% other information +% \affiliation can be followed by \email, \homepage, \thanks as well. +\author{} +%\email[]{Your e-mail address} +%\homepage[]{Your web page} +%\thanks{} +%\altaffiliation{} +\affiliation{} + +%Collaboration name if desired (requires use of superscriptaddress +%option in \documentclass). \noaffiliation is required (may also be +%used with the \author command). +%\collaboration can be followed by \email, \homepage, \thanks as well. +%\collaboration{} +%\noaffiliation + +\date{\today} + +\begin{abstract} +% insert abstract here +\end{abstract} + +% insert suggested keywords - APS authors don't need to do this +%\keywords{} + +%\maketitle must follow title, authors, abstract, and keywords +\maketitle + +% body of paper here - Use proper section commands +% References should be done using the \cite, \ref, and \label commands +\section{} +% Put \label in argument of \section for cross-referencing +%\section{\label{}} +\subsection{} +\subsubsection{} + +% If in two-column mode, this environment will change to single-column +% format so that long equations can be displayed. Use +% sparingly. +%\begin{widetext} +% put long equation here +%\end{widetext} + +% figures should be put into the text as floats. +% Use the graphics or graphicx packages (distributed with LaTeX2e) +% and the \includegraphics macro defined in those packages. +% See the LaTeX Graphics Companion by Michel Goosens, Sebastian Rahtz, +% and Frank Mittelbach for instance. +% +% Here is an example of the general form of a figure: +% Fill in the caption in the braces of the \caption{} command. Put the label +% that you will use with \ref{} command in the braces of the \label{} command. +% Use the figure* environment if the figure should span across the +% entire page. There is no need to do explicit centering. + +% \begin{figure} +% \includegraphics{}% +% \caption{\label{}} +% \end{figure} + +% Surround figure environment with turnpage environment for landscape +% figure +% \begin{turnpage} +% \begin{figure} +% \includegraphics{}% +% \caption{\label{}} +% \end{figure} +% \end{turnpage} + +% tables should appear as floats within the text +% +% Here is an example of the general form of a table: +% Fill in the caption in the braces of the \caption{} command. Put the label +% that you will use with \ref{} command in the braces of the \label{} command. +% Insert the column specifiers (l, r, c, d, etc.) in the empty braces of the +% \begin{tabular}{} command. +% The ruledtabular enviroment adds doubled rules to table and sets a +% reasonable default table settings. +% Use the table* environment to get a full-width table in two-column +% Add \usepackage{longtable} and the longtable (or longtable*} +% environment for nicely formatted long tables. Or use the the [H] +% placement option to break a long table (with less control than +% in longtable). +% \begin{table}%[H] add [H] placement to break table across pages +% \caption{\label{}} +% \begin{ruledtabular} +% \begin{tabular}{} +% Lines of table here ending with \\ +% \end{tabular} +% \end{ruledtabular} +% \end{table} + +% Surround table environment with turnpage environment for landscape +% table +% \begin{turnpage} +% \begin{table} +% \caption{\label{}} +% \begin{ruledtabular} +% \begin{tabular}{} +% \end{tabular} +% \end{ruledtabular} +% \end{table} +% \end{turnpage} + +% Specify following sections are appendices. Use \appendix* if there +% only one appendix. +%\appendix +%\section{} + +% If you have acknowledgments, this puts in the proper section head. +%\begin{acknowledgments} +% put your acknowledgments here. +%\end{acknowledgments} + +% Create the reference section using BibTeX: +\bibliography{basename of .bib file} + +\end{document} +% +% ****** End of file apstemplate.tex ****** + diff --git a/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/fig_1.eps b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/fig_1.eps new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2cd6074 --- /dev/null +++ b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/fig_1.eps @@ -0,0 +1,5 @@ +%!PS-Adobe-3.0 +%%BoundingBox: 0 0 100 100 +0 0 moveto 100 0 lineto 100 100 lineto 0 100 lineto 0 0 lineto stroke +20 50 moveto /Times-Roman findfont 10 scalefont setfont (Test Figure) show +%%EOF diff --git a/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/fig_2.eps b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/fig_2.eps new file mode 100644 index 0000000..eb637e2 --- /dev/null +++ b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/fig_2.eps @@ -0,0 +1,5 @@ +%!PS-Adobe-3.0 +%%BoundingBox: 0 0 500 80 +0 0 moveto 500 0 lineto 500 80 lineto 0 80 lineto 0 0 lineto stroke +200 40 moveto /Times-Roman findfont 10 scalefont setfont (Wide Test Figure) show +%%EOF diff --git a/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/vid_1a.eps b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/vid_1a.eps new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2388bd4 --- /dev/null +++ b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/vid_1a.eps @@ -0,0 +1,5 @@ +%!PS-Adobe-3.0 +%%BoundingBox: 0 0 100 100 +0 0 moveto 100 0 lineto 100 100 lineto 0 100 lineto 0 0 lineto stroke +20 50 moveto /Times-Roman findfont 10 scalefont setfont (Clip A Frame) show +%%EOF diff --git a/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/vid_1b.eps b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/vid_1b.eps new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a64a6dc --- /dev/null +++ b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/vid_1b.eps @@ -0,0 +1,5 @@ +%!PS-Adobe-3.0 +%%BoundingBox: 0 0 100 100 +0 0 moveto 100 0 lineto 100 100 lineto 0 100 lineto 0 0 lineto stroke +20 50 moveto /Times-Roman findfont 10 scalefont setfont (Clip B Frame) show +%%EOF diff --git a/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/sor/fig_1.eps b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/sor/fig_1.eps new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8bc5bc8 --- /dev/null +++ b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/sor/fig_1.eps @@ -0,0 +1,5 @@ +%!PS-Adobe-3.0 +%%BoundingBox: 0 0 100 100 +0 0 moveto 100 0 lineto 100 100 lineto 0 100 lineto 0 0 lineto stroke +20 50 moveto /Times findfont 10 scalefont setfont (Test Figure) show +%%EOF diff --git a/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/sor/fig_2.eps b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/sor/fig_2.eps new file mode 100644 index 0000000..cda6149 --- /dev/null +++ b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/sor/fig_2.eps @@ -0,0 +1,5 @@ +%!PS-Adobe-3.0 +%%BoundingBox: 0 0 500 80 +0 0 moveto 500 0 lineto 500 80 lineto 0 80 lineto 0 0 lineto stroke +200 40 moveto /Times findfont 10 scalefont setfont (Wide Test Figure) show +%%EOF diff --git a/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/sor/sorsamp.bib b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/sor/sorsamp.bib new file mode 100644 index 0000000..458a4b7 --- /dev/null +++ b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/sor/sorsamp.bib @@ -0,0 +1,482 @@ +@PREAMBLE{ + "\providecommand{\noopsort}[1]{}" + # "\providecommand{\singleletter}[1]{#1}%" +} + +@BOOK{Bire82, + author = {N. D. Birell and P. C. W. Davies}, + year = 1982, + title = {Quantum Fields in Curved Space}, + publisher = {Cambridge University Press} +} + +@ARTICLE{feyn54, + author = "R. P. Feynman", + year = "1954", + journal = "Phys.\ Rev.", + volume = "94", + pages = "262", +} + +@ARTICLE{epr, + author = "A. Einstein and {\relax Yu} Podolsky and N. Rosen", + year = "1935", + journal = "Phys.\ Rev.", + volume = "47", + pages = "777", +} + +@ARTICLE{Berman1983, + author = "Berman, Jr., G. P. and Izrailev, Jr., F. M.", + title = "Stability of nonlinear modes", + journal = "Physica D", + volume = "88", + pages = "445", + year = "1983", +} + +@ARTICLE{Davies1998, + author = "E. B. Davies and L. Parns", + title = "Trapped modes in acoustic waveguides", + journal = "Q. J. Mech. Appl. Math.", + volume = "51", + pages = "477--492", + year = "1988", +} + +@MISC{witten2001, + author = "Edward Witten", + eprint = "hep-th/0106109", + year = "2001", +} + +@INBOOK{Beutler1994, + author = "E. Beutler", + editor = "E. Beutler and M. A. Lichtman and B. W. Coller and T. S. Kipps", + title = "Williams Hematology", + chapter = "7", + pages = "654--662", + publisher = "McGraw-Hill", + year = "1994", + + edition = "5", + address = "New York", + volume = "2", +} + +@INBOOK{inbook-full, + author = "Donald E. Knuth", + title = "Fundamental Algorithms", + volume = 1, + series = "The Art of Computer Programming", + publisher = "Addison-Wesley", + address = "Reading, Massachusetts", + edition = "Second", + month = "10~" # jan, + year = "\noopsort{1973b}1973", + type = "Section", + chapter = "1.2", + pages = "10--119", + note = "A full INBOOK entry", +} + +@ARTICLE{Smith2005, + author = "J. S. Smith and G. W. Johnson", + journal = "Philos. Trans. R. Soc. London, Ser. B", + title = "", + year = "2005", + + volume = "777", + pages = "1395", +} + +@UNPUBLISHED{Smith2010, + author = "W. J. Smith and T. J. Johnson and B. G. Miller", + title = "Surface chemistry and preferential crystal orientation on a silicon surface", + note = "{J. Appl. Phys.} (unpublished)", + + month = "", + year = "", +} + +@UNPUBLISHED{Smith2010a, + author = "V. K. Smith and K. Johnson and M. O. Klein", + title = "Surface chemistry and preferential crystal orientation on a silicon surface", + note = "{J. Appl. Phys.} (submitted)", + + month = "", + year = "", +} + +@UNPUBLISHED{unpublished-full, + author = "Ulrich {\"{U}}nderwood and Ned {\~N}et and Paul {\={P}}ot", + title = "Lower Bounds for Wishful Research Results", + month = nov # ", " # dec, + year = 1988, + note = "Talk at Fanstord University (A full UNPUBLISHED entry)", +} + +@MISC{JohnsonMillerSmith2007, + + author = "M. P. Johnson and K. L. Miller and K. Smith", + title = "", + howpublished = "personal communication", + month = "1~" # may, + year = "2007", + note = "", +} + +@PROCEEDINGS{Smith2007, + title = "AIP Conf. Proc.", + year = "2007", + + editor = "J. Smith", + volume = "841", + number = "21", + series = "", + address = "", + month = "", + organization = "", + publisher = "", + note = "", +} + +@PROCEEDINGS{proceedings-full, + editor = "Wizard V. Oz and Mihalis Yannakakis", + title = "Proc. Fifteenth Annual", + number = 17, + series = "All ACM Conferences", + month = mar, + year = 1983, + address = "Boston", + organization = "ACM", + publisher = "Academic Press", + note = "A full PROCEEDINGS entry", +} + +@UNPUBLISHED{Burstyn2004, + author = "Y. Burstyn", + title = "{Proceedings of the 5th International Molecular Beam Epitaxy Conference, Santa Fe, NM}", + note = "(unpublished)", + + month = "5--8~" # oct, + year = "2004", +} + +@PROCEEDINGS{Quinn2001, + title = "{Proceedings of the 2003 Particle Accelerator Conference, Portland, OR, 12-16 May 2005}", + year = "2001", + + editor = "B. Quinn", + address = "New York", + publisher = "Wiley", + note = "Albeit the conference was held in 2005, it was the 2003 conference, and the proceedings were published in 2001; go figure", +} + +@ARTICLE{Agarwal2001, + author = "A. G. Agarwal", + title = "{Proceedings of the Fifth Low Temperature Conference, Madison, WI, 1999}", + journal = "Semiconductors", + year = "2001", + + volume = "66", + pages = "1238", +} + +@ARTICLE{SmithDA01, + author = "R. Smith", + title = "Hummingbirds are our friends", + journal = {J. Appl. Phys. (these proceedings)}, + year = "", + volume = "", + number = "", + pages = "", + month = "", + note = "Abstract No. DA-01", +} + +@ARTICLE{Smith2007a, + author = "J. Smith", + title = "", + journal = "Proc. SPIE", + year = "2007", + + volume = "124", + pages = "367", + note = "Required title is missing", +} + +@TECHREPORT{techreport-full, + author = "Tom T{\'{e}}rrific", + title = "An {$O(n \log n / \! \log\log n)$} Sorting Algorithm", + institution = "Fanstord University", + type = "Wishful Research Result", + number = "7", + address = "Computer Science Department, Fanstord, California", + month = oct, + year = 1988, + note = "A full TECHREPORT entry", +} + +@TECHREPORT{Nelson1999, + author = "J. Nelson", + type = "{TWI Report}", + number = "666/1999", + institution = "", + year = jan # "~1999", + + note = "Required institution missing", +} + +@TECHREPORT{Fields2005, + author = "W. K. Fields", + type = "{ECE Report No.}", + number = "AL944", + institution = "", + year = "2005", + + note = "Required institution missing", +} + +@MISC{Zalkins2008, + + author = "Y. M. Zalkins", + title = "", + howpublished = "e-print arXiv:cond-mat/040426", + month = "", + year = "2008", + note = "", +} + +@MISC{Nelson2005, + + author = "J. Nelson", + howpublished = "{U.S. Patent No.} 5,693,000", + year = "12~" # dec # "~2005", +} + +@MASTERSTHESIS{Nelson1999a, + author = "J. K. Nelson", + title = "", + school = "New York University", + year = "1999", + + type = "M.{S}. thesis", + address = "", + month = "", + note = "", +} + +@MASTERSTHESIS{mastersthesis-full, + author = "{\'{E}}douard Masterly", + title = "Mastering Thesis Writing", + school = "Stanford University", + type = "Master's project", + address = "English Department", + month = jun # "-" # aug, + year = 1988, + note = "A full MASTERSTHESIS entry", +} + +@PHDTHESIS{Smith2003, + author = "S. M. Smith", + title = "", + school = "Massachusetts Institute of Technology", + year = "2003", + + type = "{Ph.D.} thesis", + address = "", + month = "", + note = "", +} + +@ARTICLE{KawaLin2003, + author = "S. R. Kawa and S.-J. Lin", + title = "", + journal = "J. Geophys. Res.", + year = "2003", + + volume = "108", + number = "D6", + pages = "4201", + month = "", + note = "{DOI:10.1029/2002JD002268}", +} + +@PHDTHESIS{phdthesis-full, + author = "F. Phidias Phony-Baloney", + title = "Fighting Fire with Fire: Festooning {F}rench Phrases", + school = "Fanstord University", + type = "{PhD} Dissertation", + address = "Department of French", + month = jun # "-" # aug, + year = 1988, + note = "A full PHDTHESIS entry", +} + +@BOOK{book-full, + author = "Donald E. Knuth", + title = "Seminumerical Algorithms", + volume = 2, + series = "The Art of Computer Programming", + publisher = "Addison-Wesley", + address = "Reading, Massachusetts", + edition = "Second", + month = "10~" # jan, + year = "\noopsort{1973c}1981", + note = "A full BOOK entry", +} + +@BOOKLET{booklet-full, + author = "Jill C. Knvth", + title = "The Programming of Computer Art", + howpublished = "Vernier Art Center", + address = "Stanford, California", + month = feb, + year = 1988, + note = "A full BOOKLET entry", +} + +@INBOOK{ballagh2000, + author = "R. Ballagh and C.M. Savage", + editor = "C.M. Savage and M. Das", + title = "Bose-Einstein condensation: from atomic physics to quantum fluids, Proceedings of the 13th Physics Summer School", + year = "2000", + publisher = "World Scientific", + address = "Singapore", + eprint = "cond-mat/0008070", +} + +@inBook{Magnetism, + author = "W. Opechowski and R. Guccione", + title = "Introduction to the Theory of Normal Metals", + volume = "IIa", + pages = "105", + editor = "G. T. Rado and H. Suhl", + booktitle = "Magnetism", + publisher = "Academic Press", + address = "New York", +} + year = "1965", + +@INPROCEEDINGS{Magnetismb, + author = "W. Opechowski and R. Guccione", + title = "Introduction to the Theory of Normal Metals", + editor = "G. T. Rado and H. Suhl", + booktitle = "Magnetism", + volume = "IIa", + pages = "105", + publisher = "Academic Press", + address = "New York", + year = "1965", +} + +@INBOOK{Smith80, + author = "J. M. Smith", + title = "Molecular Dynamics", + publisher = "Academic", + year = "1980", + address = "New York", + editor = "C. Brown", +} + +@article{ZS71, + author = "V. E. Zakharov and A. B. Shabat", + year = "1971", + title = "Exact theory of two-dimensional self-focusing and one-dimensional self-modulation of waves in nonlinear media", + journal = "Zh. Eksp. Teor. Fiz.", + volume = "61", + pages = "118--134", + translation = "Sov. Phys. JETP \textbf{34}, 62 (1972)" +} + +@INCOLLECTION{Beutler1994a, + author = "E. Beutler", + year = "1994", + booktitle = "Williams Hematology", + edition = "5", + chapter = "7", + editor = "E. Beutler and M. A. Lichtman and B. W. Coller and T. S. Kipps", + publisher = "McGraw-Hill", + address = "New York", + volume = "2", + pages = "654--662", +} + +@INCOLLECTION{ballagh2000a, + author = "R. Ballagh and C.M. Savage", + year = "2000", + title = "Bose-Einstein condensation: from atomic physics to quantum fluids", + booktitle = "Proceedings of the 13th Physics Summer School", + editor = "C.M. Savage and M. Das", + publisher = "World Scientific", + address = "Singapore", + eprint = "cond-mat/0008070", +} + +@INCOLLECTION{Magnetisma, + author = "W. Opechowski and R. Guccione", + year = "1965", + title = "Introduction to the Theory of Normal Metals", + booktitle = "Magnetism", + editor = "G. T. Rado and H. Suhl", + publisher = "Academic Press", + address = "New York", + volume = "IIa", + pages = "105", +} + +@INCOLLECTION{Smith80a, + author = "J. M. Smith", + year = "1980", + booktitle = "Molecular Dynamics", + editor = "C. Brown", + publisher = "Academic", + address = "New York", +} + +@INCOLLECTION{incollection-full, + key = "incol-ful", + author = "Daniel D. Lincoll", + year = 1977, + title = "Semigroups of Recurrences", + booktitle = "High Speed Computer and Algorithm Organization", + edition = "Third", + series = "Fast Computers", + number = 23, + chapter = 3, + type = "Part", + editor = "David J. Lipcoll and D. H. Lawrie and A. H. Sameh", + publisher = "Academic Press", + address = "New York", + month = sep, + pages = "179--183", + note = "A full INCOLLECTION entry", +} + +@INPROCEEDINGS{inproceedings-full, + author = "Alfred V. Oaho and Jeffrey D. Ullman and Mihalis Yannakakis", + title = "On Notions of Information Transfer in {VLSI} Circuits", + editor = "Wizard V. Oz and Mihalis Yannakakis", + booktitle = "Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM", + number = 17, + series = "All ACM Conferences", + pages = "133--139", + month = mar, + year = 1983, + address = "Boston", + organization = "ACM", + publisher = "Academic Press", + note = "A full INPROCEDINGS entry", +} + +@MANUAL{manual-full, + author = "Larry Manmaker", + title = "The Definitive Computer Manual", + organization = "Chips-R-Us", + address = "Silicon Valley", + edition = "Silver", + month = apr # "-" # may, + year = 1986, + note = "A full MANUAL entry", +} diff --git a/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/sor/sorsamp.pdf b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/sor/sorsamp.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..9df32f8 --- /dev/null +++ b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/sor/sorsamp.pdf diff --git a/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/sor/sorsamp.tex b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/sor/sorsamp.tex new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e44460e --- /dev/null +++ b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/sor/sorsamp.tex @@ -0,0 +1,614 @@ +% ****** Start of file sorsamp.tex ****** +% +% This file is part of the AIP files in the AIP distribution for REVTeX 4. +% Version 4.2a of REVTeX, December 2014 +% +% Copyright (c) 2014 American Institute of Physics. +% +% See the AIP README file for restrictions and more information. +% +% TeX'ing this file requires that you have AMS-LaTeX 2.0 installed +% as well as the rest of the prerequisites for REVTeX 4.2 +% +% It also requires running BibTeX. The commands are as follows: +% +% 1) latex sorsamp +% 2) bibtex sorsamp +% 3) latex sorsamp +% 4) latex sorsamp +% +% Use this file as a source of example code for your aip document. +% Use the file aiptemplate.tex as a template for your document. +\documentclass[% + sor, +%aip, +%twoside, +%groupedaddress, +%jmp, + jor, + amsmath,amssymb, +%preprint,% + reprint,% +%author-year,% +%author-numerical,% +]{revtex4-2} + +\usepackage{graphicx}% Include figure files +\usepackage{dcolumn}% Align table columns on decimal point +\usepackage{bm}% bold math +%\usepackage[mathlines]{lineno}% Enable numbering of text and display math +%\linenumbers\relax % Commence numbering lines + +\begin{document} + +\preprint{AIP/123-QED} + +\title[Sample title]{Sample Title:\\with Forced Linebreak\footnote{Error!}}% Force line breaks with \\ +\thanks{Footnote to title of article.} + +\author{A. Author} + \altaffiliation[Also at ]{Physics Department, XYZ University.}%Lines break automatically or can be forced with \\ +\author{B. Author}% + \email{Second.Author@institution.edu.} +\affiliation{ +Authors' institution and/or address%\\This line break forced with \textbackslash\textbackslash +}% + +\author{C. Author} + \homepage{http://www.Second.institution.edu/~Charlie.Author.} +\affiliation{% +Second institution and/or address%\\This line break forced% with \\ +}% + +\date{\today}% It is always \today, today, + % but any date may be explicitly specified + +\begin{abstract} +An article usually includes an abstract, a concise summary of the work +covered at length in the main body of the article. It is used for +secondary publications and for information retrieval purposes. +% +\end{abstract} + +\keywords{Suggested keywords}%Use showkeys class option if keyword + %display desired +\maketitle + +\begin{quotation} +The ``lead paragraph'' is encapsulated with the \LaTeX\ +\verb+quotation+ environment and is formatted as a single paragraph before the first section heading. +(The \verb+quotation+ environment reverts to its usual meaning after the first sectioning command.) +Note that numbered references are allowed in the lead paragraph. +% +The lead paragraph will only be found in an article being prepared for the journal \textit{Chaos}. +\end{quotation} + +\section{\label{sec:level1}First-level heading:\protect\\ The line +break was forced \lowercase{via} \textbackslash\textbackslash} + +This sample document demonstrates proper use of REV\TeX~4.2 (and +\LaTeXe) in manuscripts prepared for submission to AIP +journals. Further information can be found in the documentation included in the distribution or available at +\url{http://authors.aip.org} and in the documentation for +REV\TeX~4.2 itself. + +When commands are referred to in this example file, they are always +shown with their required arguments, using normal \TeX{} format. In +this format, \verb+#1+, \verb+#2+, etc. stand for required +author-supplied arguments to commands. For example, in +\verb+\section{#1}+ the \verb+#1+ stands for the title text of the +author's section heading, and in \verb+\title{#1}+ the \verb+#1+ +stands for the title text of the paper. + +Line breaks in section headings at all levels can be introduced using +\textbackslash\textbackslash. A blank input line tells \TeX\ that the +paragraph has ended. + +\subsection{\label{sec:level2}Second-level heading: Formatting} + +This file may be formatted in both the \texttt{preprint} (the default) and +\texttt{reprint} styles; the latter format may be used to +mimic final journal output. Either format may be used for submission +purposes; however, for peer review and production, AIP will format the +article using the \texttt{preprint} class option. Hence, it is +essential that authors check that their manuscripts format acceptably +under \texttt{preprint}. Manuscripts submitted to AIP that do not +format correctly under the \texttt{preprint} option may be delayed in +both the editorial and production processes. + +The \texttt{widetext} environment will make the text the width of the +full page, as on page~\pageref{eq:wideeq}. (Note the use the +\verb+\pageref{#1}+ to get the page number right automatically.) The +width-changing commands only take effect in \texttt{twocolumn} +formatting. It has no effect if \texttt{preprint} formatting is chosen +instead. + +\subsubsection{\label{sec:level3}Third-level heading: Citations and Footnotes} + +Citations in text refer to entries in the Bibliography; +they use the commands \verb+\cite{#1}+ or \verb+\onlinecite{#1}+. +Because REV\TeX\ uses the \verb+natbib+ package of Patrick Daly, +its entire repertoire of commands are available in your document; +see the \verb+natbib+ documentation for further details. +The argument of \verb+\cite+ is a comma-separated list of \emph{keys}; +a key may consist of letters and numerals. + +By default, citations are numerical; \cite{feyn54} author-year citations are an option. +To give a textual citation, use \verb+\onlinecite{#1}+: (Refs.~\onlinecite{witten2001,epr,Bire82}). +REV\TeX\ ``collapses'' lists of consecutive numerical citations when appropriate. +REV\TeX\ provides the ability to properly punctuate textual citations in author-year style; +this facility works correctly with numerical citations only with \texttt{natbib}'s compress option turned off. +To illustrate, we cite several together \cite{feyn54,witten2001,epr,Berman1983}, +and once again (Refs.~\onlinecite{epr,feyn54,Bire82,Berman1983}). +Note that, when numerical citations are used, the references were sorted into the same order they appear in the bibliography. + +A reference within the bibliography is specified with a \verb+\bibitem{#1}+ command, +where the argument is the citation key mentioned above. +\verb+\bibitem{#1}+ commands may be crafted by hand or, preferably, +generated by using Bib\TeX. +The AIP styles for REV\TeX~4 include Bib\TeX\ style files +\verb+aipnum.bst+ and \verb+aipauth.bst+, appropriate for +numbered and author-year bibliographies, +respectively. +REV\TeX~4 will automatically choose the style appropriate for +the document's selected class options: the default is numerical, and +you obtain the author-year style by specifying a class option of \verb+author-year+. + +This sample file demonstrates a simple use of Bib\TeX\ +via a \verb+\bibliography+ command referencing the \verb+sorsamp.bib+ file. +Running Bib\TeX\ (in this case \texttt{bibtex +sorsamp}) after the first pass of \LaTeX\ produces the file +\verb+sorsamp.bbl+ which contains the automatically formatted +\verb+\bibitem+ commands (including extra markup information via +\verb+\bibinfo+ commands). If not using Bib\TeX, the +\verb+thebibiliography+ environment should be used instead. + +\paragraph{Fourth-level heading is run in.}% +Footnotes are produced using the \verb+\footnote{#1}+ command. +Numerical style citations put footnotes into the +bibliography\footnote{Automatically placing footnotes into the bibliography requires using BibTeX to compile the bibliography.}. +Author-year and numerical author-year citation styles (each for its own reason) cannot use this method. +Note: due to the method used to place footnotes in the bibliography, \emph{you +must re-run BibTeX every time you change any of your document's +footnotes}. + +\section{Math and Equations} +Inline math may be typeset using the \verb+$+ delimiters. Bold math +symbols may be achieved using the \verb+bm+ package and the +\verb+\bm{#1}+ command it supplies. For instance, a bold $\alpha$ can +be typeset as \verb+$\bm{\alpha}$+ giving $\bm{\alpha}$. Fraktur and +Blackboard (or open face or double struck) characters should be +typeset using the \verb+\mathfrak{#1}+ and \verb+\mathbb{#1}+ commands +respectively. Both are supplied by the \texttt{amssymb} package. For +example, \verb+$\mathbb{R}$+ gives $\mathbb{R}$ and +\verb+$\mathfrak{G}$+ gives $\mathfrak{G}$ + +In \LaTeX\ there are many different ways to display equations, and a +few preferred ways are noted below. Displayed math will center by +default. Use the class option \verb+fleqn+ to flush equations left. + +Below we have numbered single-line equations, the most common kind: +\begin{eqnarray} +\chi_+(p)\alt{\bf [}2|{\bf p}|(|{\bf p}|+p_z){\bf ]}^{-1/2} +\left( +\begin{array}{c} +|{\bf p}|+p_z\\ +px+ip_y +\end{array}\right)\;, +\\ +\left\{% + \openone234567890abc123\alpha\beta\gamma\delta1234556\alpha\beta + \frac{1\sum^{a}_{b}}{A^2}% +\right\}% +\label{eq:one}. +\end{eqnarray} +Note the open one in Eq.~(\ref{eq:one}). + +Not all numbered equations will fit within a narrow column this +way. The equation number will move down automatically if it cannot fit +on the same line with a one-line equation: +\begin{equation} +\left\{ + ab12345678abc123456abcdef\alpha\beta\gamma\delta1234556\alpha\beta + \frac{1\sum^{a}_{b}}{A^2}% +\right\}. +\end{equation} + +When the \verb+\label{#1}+ command is used [cf. input for +Eq.~(\ref{eq:one})], the equation can be referred to in text without +knowing the equation number that \TeX\ will assign to it. Just +use \verb+\ref{#1}+, where \verb+#1+ is the same name that used in +the \verb+\label{#1}+ command. + +Unnumbered single-line equations can be typeset +using the \verb+\[+, \verb+\]+ format: +\[g^+g^+ \rightarrow g^+g^+g^+g^+ \dots ~,~~q^+q^+\rightarrow +q^+g^+g^+ \dots ~. \] + +\subsection{Multiline equations} + +Multiline equations are obtained by using the \verb+eqnarray+ +environment. Use the \verb+\nonumber+ command at the end of each line +to avoid assigning a number: +\begin{eqnarray} +{\cal M}=&&ig_Z^2(4E_1E_2)^{1/2}(l_i^2)^{-1} +\delta_{\sigma_1,-\sigma_2} +(g_{\sigma_2}^e)^2\chi_{-\sigma_2}(p_2)\nonumber\\ +&&\times +[\epsilon_jl_i\epsilon_i]_{\sigma_1}\chi_{\sigma_1}(p_1), +\end{eqnarray} +\begin{eqnarray} +\sum \vert M^{\text{viol}}_g \vert ^2&=&g^{2n-4}_S(Q^2)~N^{n-2} + (N^2-1)\nonumber \\ + & &\times \left( \sum_{i<j}\right) + \sum_{\text{perm}} + \frac{1}{S_{12}} + \frac{1}{S_{12}} + \sum_\tau c^f_\tau~. +\end{eqnarray} +\textbf{Note:} Do not use \verb+\label{#1}+ on a line of a multiline +equation if \verb+\nonumber+ is also used on that line. Incorrect +cross-referencing will result. Notice the use \verb+\text{#1}+ for +using a Roman font within a math environment. + +To set a multiline equation without \emph{any} equation +numbers, use the \verb+\begin{eqnarray*}+, +\verb+\end{eqnarray*}+ format: +\begin{eqnarray*} +\sum \vert M^{\text{viol}}_g \vert ^2&=&g^{2n-4}_S(Q^2)~N^{n-2} + (N^2-1)\\ + & &\times \left( \sum_{i<j}\right) + \left( + \sum_{\text{perm}}\frac{1}{S_{12}S_{23}S_{n1}} + \right) + \frac{1}{S_{12}}~. +\end{eqnarray*} +To obtain numbers not normally produced by the automatic numbering, +use the \verb+\tag{#1}+ command, where \verb+#1+ is the desired +equation number. For example, to get an equation number of +(\ref{eq:mynum}), +\begin{equation} +g^+g^+ \rightarrow g^+g^+g^+g^+ \dots ~,~~q^+q^+\rightarrow +q^+g^+g^+ \dots ~. \tag{2.6$'$}\label{eq:mynum} +\end{equation} + +A few notes on \verb=\tag{#1}=. \verb+\tag{#1}+ requires +\texttt{amsmath}. The \verb+\tag{#1}+ must come before the +\verb+\label{#1}+, if any. The numbering set with \verb+\tag{#1}+ is +\textit{transparent} to the automatic numbering in REV\TeX{}; +therefore, the number must be known ahead of time, and it must be +manually adjusted if other equations are added. \verb+\tag{#1}+ works +with both single-line and multiline equations. \verb+\tag{#1}+ should +only be used in exceptional case - do not use it to number all +equations in a paper. + +Enclosing single-line and multiline equations in +\verb+\begin{subequations}+ and \verb+\end{subequations}+ will produce +a set of equations that are ``numbered'' with letters, as shown in +Eqs.~(\ref{subeq:1}) and (\ref{subeq:2}) below: +\begin{subequations} +\label{eq:whole} +\begin{equation} +\left\{ + abc123456abcdef\alpha\beta\gamma\delta1234556\alpha\beta + \frac{1\sum^{a}_{b}}{A^2} +\right\},\label{subeq:1} +\end{equation} +\begin{eqnarray} +{\cal M}=&&ig_Z^2(4E_1E_2)^{1/2}(l_i^2)^{-1} +(g_{\sigma_2}^e)^2\chi_{-\sigma_2}(p_2)\nonumber\\ +&&\times +[\epsilon_i]_{\sigma_1}\chi_{\sigma_1}(p_1).\label{subeq:2} +\end{eqnarray} +\end{subequations} +Putting a \verb+\label{#1}+ command right after the +\verb+\begin{subequations}+, allows one to +reference all the equations in a subequations environment. For +example, the equations in the preceding subequations environment were +Eqs.~(\ref{eq:whole}). + +\subsubsection{Wide equations} +The equation that follows is set in a wide format, i.e., it spans +across the full page. The wide format is reserved for long equations +that cannot be easily broken into four lines or less: +\begin{widetext} +\begin{equation} +{\cal R}^{(\text{d})}= + g_{\sigma_2}^e + \left( + \frac{[\Gamma^Z(3,21)]_{\sigma_1}}{Q_{12}^2-M_W^2} + +\frac{[\Gamma^Z(13,2)]_{\sigma_1}}{Q_{13}^2-M_W^2} + \right) + + x_WQ_e + \left( + \frac{[\Gamma^\gamma(3,21)]_{\sigma_1}}{Q_{12}^2-M_W^2} + +\frac{[\Gamma^\gamma(13,2)]_{\sigma_1}}{Q_{13}^2-M_W^2} + \right)\;. \label{eq:wideeq} +\end{equation} +\end{widetext} +This is typed to show the output is in wide format. +(Since there is no input line between \verb+\equation+ and +this paragraph, there is no paragraph indent for this paragraph.) +\section{Cross-referencing} +REV\TeX{} will automatically number sections, equations, figure +captions, and tables. In order to reference them in text, use the +\verb+\label{#1}+ and \verb+\ref{#1}+ commands. To reference a +particular page, use the \verb+\pageref{#1}+ command. + +The \verb+\label{#1}+ should appear in a section heading, within an +equation, or in a table or figure caption. The \verb+\ref{#1}+ command +is used in the text where the citation is to be displayed. Some +examples: Section~\ref{sec:level1} on page~\pageref{sec:level1}, +Table~\ref{tab:table1},% +\begin{table} +\caption{\label{tab:table1}This is a narrow table which fits into a +text column when using \texttt{twocolumn} formatting. Note that +REV\TeX~4 adjusts the intercolumn spacing so that the table fills the +entire width of the column. Table captions are numbered +automatically. This table illustrates left-aligned, centered, and +right-aligned columns. } +\begin{ruledtabular} +\begin{tabular}{lcr} +Left\footnote{Note a.}&Centered\footnote{Note b.}&Right\\ +\hline +1 & 2 & 3\\ +10 & 20 & 30\\ +100 & 200 & 300\\ +\end{tabular} +\end{ruledtabular} +\end{table} +and Fig.~\ref{fig:epsart}. + +\section{Figures and Tables} +Figures and tables are typically ``floats''; \LaTeX\ determines their +final position via placement rules. +\LaTeX\ isn't always successful in automatically placing floats where you wish them. + +Figures are marked up with the \texttt{figure} environment, the content of which +imports the image (\verb+\includegraphics+) followed by the figure caption (\verb+\caption+). +The argument of the latter command should itself contain a \verb+\label+ command if you +wish to refer to your figure with \verb+\ref+. + +Import your image using either the \texttt{graphics} or +\texttt{graphix} packages. These packages both define the +\verb+\includegraphics{#1}+ command, but they differ in the optional +arguments for specifying the orientation, scaling, and translation of the figure. +Fig.~\ref{fig:epsart}% +\begin{figure} +\includegraphics{fig_1}% Here is how to import EPS art +\caption{\label{fig:epsart} A figure caption. The figure captions are +automatically numbered.} +\end{figure} +is small enough to fit in a single column, while +Fig.~\ref{fig:wide}% +\begin{figure*} +\includegraphics{fig_2}% Here is how to import EPS art +\caption{\label{fig:wide}Use the \texttt{figure*} environment to get a wide +figure, spanning the page in \texttt{twocolumn} formatting.} +\end{figure*} +is too wide for a single column, +so instead the \texttt{figure*} environment has been used. + +The analog of the \texttt{figure} environment is \texttt{table}, which uses +the same \verb+\caption+ command. +However, you should type your caption command first within the \texttt{table}, +instead of last as you did for \texttt{figure}. + +The heart of any table is the \texttt{tabular} environment, +which represents the table content as a (vertical) sequence of table rows, +each containing a (horizontal) sequence of table cells. +Cells are separated by the \verb+&+ character; +the row terminates with \verb+\\+. +The required argument for the \texttt{tabular} environment +specifies how data are displayed in each of the columns. +For instance, a column +may be centered (\verb+c+), left-justified (\verb+l+), right-justified (\verb+r+), +or aligned on a decimal point (\verb+d+). +(Table~\ref{tab:table4}% +\begin{table} +\caption{\label{tab:table4}Numbers in columns Three--Five have been +aligned by using the ``d'' column specifier (requires the +\texttt{dcolumn} package). +Non-numeric entries (those entries without +a ``.'') in a ``d'' column are aligned on the decimal point. +Use the +``D'' specifier for more complex layouts. } +\begin{ruledtabular} +\begin{tabular}{ccddd} +One&Two&\mbox{Three}&\mbox{Four}&\mbox{Five}\\ +\hline +one&two&\mbox{three}&\mbox{four}&\mbox{five}\\ +He&2& 2.77234 & 45672. & 0.69 \\ +C\footnote{Some tables require footnotes.} + &C\footnote{Some tables need more than one footnote.} + & 12537.64 & 37.66345 & 86.37 \\ +\end{tabular} +\end{ruledtabular} +\end{table} +illustrates the use of decimal column alignment.) + +Extra column-spacing may be be specified as well, although +REV\TeX~4 sets this spacing so that the columns fill the width of the +table. +Horizontal rules are typeset using the \verb+\hline+ +command. +The doubled (or Scotch) rules that appear at the top and +bottom of a table can be achieved by enclosing the \texttt{tabular} +environment within a \texttt{ruledtabular} environment. +Rows whose columns span multiple columns can be typeset using \LaTeX's +\verb+\multicolumn{#1}{#2}{#3}+ command +(for example, see the first row of Table~\ref{tab:table3}).% +\begin{table*} +\caption{\label{tab:table3}This is a wide table that spans the page +width in \texttt{twocolumn} mode. It is formatted using the +\texttt{table*} environment. It also demonstrates the use of +\textbackslash\texttt{multicolumn} in rows with entries that span +more than one column.} +\begin{ruledtabular} +\begin{tabular}{ccccc} + &\multicolumn{2}{c}{$D_{4h}^1$}&\multicolumn{2}{c}{$D_{4h}^5$}\\ + Ion&1st alternative&2nd alternative&lst alternative +&2nd alternative\\ \hline + K&$(2e)+(2f)$&$(4i)$ &$(2c)+(2d)$&$(4f)$ \\ + Mn&$(2g)$\footnote{The $z$ parameter of these positions is $z\sim\frac{1}{4}$.} + &$(a)+(b)+(c)+(d)$&$(4e)$&$(2a)+(2b)$\\ + Cl&$(a)+(b)+(c)+(d)$&$(2g)$\footnote{This is a footnote in a table that spans the full page +width in \texttt{twocolumn} mode. It is supposed to set on the full width of the page, just as the caption does. } + &$(4e)^{\text{a}}$\\ + He&$(8r)^{\text{a}}$&$(4j)^{\text{a}}$&$(4g)^{\text{a}}$\\ + Ag& &$(4k)^{\text{a}}$& &$(4h)^{\text{a}}$\\ +\end{tabular} +\end{ruledtabular} +\end{table*} + +The tables in this document illustrate various effects. +Tables that fit in a narrow column are contained in a \texttt{table} +environment. +Table~\ref{tab:table3} is a wide table, therefore set with the +\texttt{table*} environment. +Lengthy tables may need to break across pages. +A simple way to allow this is to specify +the \verb+[H]+ float placement on the \texttt{table} or +\texttt{table*} environment. +Alternatively, using the standard \LaTeXe\ package \texttt{longtable} +gives more control over how tables break and allows headers and footers +to be specified for each page of the table. +An example of the use of \texttt{longtable} can be found +in the file \texttt{summary.tex} that is included with the REV\TeX~4 +distribution. + +There are two methods for setting footnotes within a table (these +footnotes will be displayed directly below the table rather than at +the bottom of the page or in the bibliography). +The easiest +and preferred method is just to use the \verb+\footnote{#1}+ +command. This will automatically enumerate the footnotes with +lowercase roman letters. +However, it is sometimes necessary to have +multiple entries in the table share the same footnote. +In this case, +create the footnotes using +\verb+\footnotemark[#1]+ and \verb+\footnotetext[#1]{#2}+. +\texttt{\#1} is a numeric value. +Each time the same value for \texttt{\#1} is used, +the same mark is produced in the table. +The \verb+\footnotetext[#1]{#2}+ commands are placed after the \texttt{tabular} +environment. +Examine the \LaTeX\ source and output for Tables~\ref{tab:table1} and +\ref{tab:table2}% +\begin{table} +\caption{\label{tab:table2}A table with more columns still fits +properly in a column. Note that several entries share the same +footnote. Inspect the \LaTeX\ input for this table to see +exactly how it is done.} +\begin{ruledtabular} +\begin{tabular}{cccccccc} + &$r_c$ (\AA)&$r_0$ (\AA)&$\kappa r_0$& + &$r_c$ (\AA) &$r_0$ (\AA)&$\kappa r_0$\\ +\hline +Cu& 0.800 & 14.10 & 2.550 &Sn\footnotemark[1] +& 0.680 & 1.870 & 3.700 \\ +Ag& 0.990 & 15.90 & 2.710 &Pb\footnotemark[2] +& 0.450 & 1.930 & 3.760 \\ +Au& 1.150 & 15.90 & 2.710 &Ca\footnotemark[3] +& 0.750 & 2.170 & 3.560 \\ +Mg& 0.490 & 17.60 & 3.200 &Sr\footnotemark[4] +& 0.900 & 2.370 & 3.720 \\ +Zn& 0.300 & 15.20 & 2.970 &Li\footnotemark[2] +& 0.380 & 1.730 & 2.830 \\ +Cd& 0.530 & 17.10 & 3.160 &Na\footnotemark[5] +& 0.760 & 2.110 & 3.120 \\ +Hg& 0.550 & 17.80 & 3.220 &K\footnotemark[5] +& 1.120 & 2.620 & 3.480 \\ +Al& 0.230 & 15.80 & 3.240 &Rb\footnotemark[3] +& 1.330 & 2.800 & 3.590 \\ +Ga& 0.310 & 16.70 & 3.330 &Cs\footnotemark[4] +& 1.420 & 3.030 & 3.740 \\ +In& 0.460 & 18.40 & 3.500 &Ba\footnotemark[5] +& 0.960 & 2.460 & 3.780 \\ +Tl& 0.480 & 18.90 & 3.550 & & & & \\ +\end{tabular} +\end{ruledtabular} +\footnotetext[1]{Here's the first, from Ref.~\onlinecite{feyn54}.} +\footnotetext[2]{Here's the second.} +\footnotetext[3]{Here's the third.} +\footnotetext[4]{Here's the fourth.} +\footnotetext[5]{And etc.} +\end{table} +for an illustration. + +All AIP journals require that the initial citation of +figures or tables be in numerical order. +\LaTeX's automatic numbering of floats is your friend here: +just put each \texttt{figure} environment immediately following +its first reference (\verb+\ref+), as we have done in this example file. + +\begin{acknowledgments} +We wish to acknowledge the support of the author community in using +REV\TeX{}, offering suggestions and encouragement, testing new versions, +\dots. +\end{acknowledgments} + +\appendix + +\section{Appendixes} + +To start the appendixes, use the \verb+\appendix+ command. +This signals that all following section commands refer to appendixes +instead of regular sections. Therefore, the \verb+\appendix+ command +should be used only once---to set up the section commands to act as +appendixes. Thereafter normal section commands are used. The heading +for a section can be left empty. For example, +\begin{verbatim} +\appendix +\section{} +\end{verbatim} +will produce an appendix heading that says ``APPENDIX A'' and +\begin{verbatim} +\appendix +\section{Background} +\end{verbatim} +will produce an appendix heading that says ``APPENDIX A: BACKGROUND'' +(note that the colon is set automatically). + +If there is only one appendix, then the letter ``A'' should not +appear. This is suppressed by using the star version of the appendix +command (\verb+\appendix*+ in the place of \verb+\appendix+). + +\section{A little more on appendixes} + +Observe that this appendix was started by using +\begin{verbatim} +\section{A little more on appendixes} +\end{verbatim} + +Note the equation number in an appendix: +\begin{equation} +E=mc^2. +\end{equation} + +\subsection{\label{app:subsec}A subsection in an appendix} + +You can use a subsection or subsubsection in an appendix. Note the +numbering: we are now in Appendix~\ref{app:subsec}. + +\subsubsection{\label{app:subsubsec}A subsubsection in an appendix} +Note the equation numbers in this appendix, produced with the +subequations environment: +\begin{subequations} +\begin{eqnarray} +E&=&mc, \label{appa} +\\ +E&=&mc^2, \label{appb} +\\ +E&\agt& mc^3. \label{appc} +\end{eqnarray} +\end{subequations} +They turn out to be Eqs.~(\ref{appa}), (\ref{appb}), and (\ref{appc}). + +\nocite{*} +\bibliography{sorsamp}% Produces the bibliography via BibTeX. + +\end{document} +% +% ****** End of file sorsamp.tex ****** diff --git a/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/sor/sortemplate.tex b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/sor/sortemplate.tex new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8bacf80 --- /dev/null +++ b/texmf/doc/latex/revtex/sample/sor/sortemplate.tex @@ -0,0 +1,105 @@ +%% ****** Start of file sortemplate.tex ****** % +%% +%% This file is part of the files in the distribution of AIP substyles for REVTeX4. +%% Version 4.2 of December 2014. +%% +% +% This is a template for producing documents for use with +% the REVTEX 4.2 document class and the AIP substyles. +% +% Copy this file to another name and then work on that file. +% That way, you always have this original template file to use. + +\documentclass[sor,graphicx]{revtex4-2} +%\documentclass[sor,reprint]{revtex4-2} + +\draft % marks overfull lines with a black rule on the right + +\begin{document} + +% Use the \preprint command to place your local institutional report number +% on the title page in preprint mode. +% Multiple \preprint commands are allowed. +%\preprint{} + +\title{} %Title of paper + +% repeat the \author .. \affiliation etc. as needed +% \email, \thanks, \homepage, \altaffiliation all apply to the current author. +% Explanatory text should go in the []'s, +% actual e-mail address or url should go in the {}'s for \email and \homepage. +% Please use the appropriate macro for the type of information + +% \affiliation command applies to all authors since the last \affiliation command. +% The \affiliation command should follow the other information. + +\author{} +%\email[]{Your e-mail address} +%\homepage[]{Your web page} +%\thanks{} +%\altaffiliation{} +\affiliation{} + +% Collaboration name, if desired (requires use of superscriptaddress option in \documentclass). +% \noaffiliation is required (may also be used with the \author command). +%\collaboration{} +%\noaffiliation + +\date{\today} + +\begin{abstract} +% insert abstract here +\end{abstract} + +\maketitle %\maketitle must follow title, authors, abstract + +% Body of paper goes here. Use proper sectioning commands. +% References should be done using the \cite, \ref, and \label commands +\section{} +%\label{} +\subsection{} +\subsubsection{} + +% If in two-column mode, this environment will change to single-column format so that long equations can be displayed. +% Use only when necessary. +%\begin{widetext} +%$$\mbox{put long equation here}$$ +%\end{widetext} + +% Figures should be put into the text as floats. +% Use the graphics or graphicx packages (distributed with LaTeX2e). +% See the LaTeX Graphics Companion by Michel Goosens, Sebastian Rahtz, and Frank Mittelbach for examples. +% +% Here is an example of the general form of a figure: +% Fill in the caption in the braces of the \caption{} command. +% Put the label that you will use with \ref{} command in the braces of the \label{} command. +% +% \begin{figure} +% \includegraphics{}% +% \caption{\label{}}% +% \end{figure} + +% Tables may be be put in the text as floats. +% Here is an example of the general form of a table: +% Fill in the caption in the braces of the \caption{} command. Put the label +% that you will use with \ref{} command in the braces of the \label{} command. +% Insert the column specifiers (l, r, c, d, etc.) in the empty braces of the +% \begin{tabular}{} command. +% +% \begin{table} +% \caption{\label{} } +% \begin{tabular}{} +% \end{tabular} +% \end{table} + +% If you have acknowledgments, this puts in the proper section head. +%\begin{acknowledgments} +% Put your acknowledgments here. +%\end{acknowledgments} + +% Create the reference section using BibTeX: +\bibliography{your-bib-file} + +\end{document} +% +% ****** End of file sortemplate.tex ****** |